-
Contents
-
Table of Contents
-
Troubleshooting
-
Bookmarks
Quick Links
BA00046D/06/EN/16.15
71279854
Valid as of version
V 2.04.XX (device software)
6
Products
Operating Instructions
Proline Promag 50
HART
Electromagnetic flowmeter
Solutions
Services
Related Manuals for Endress+Hauser Proline Promag 50
Summary of Contents for Endress+Hauser Proline Promag 50
-
Page 1
Products Solutions Services BA00046D/06/EN/16.15 71279854 Valid as of version V 2.04.XX (device software) Operating Instructions Proline Promag 50 HART Electromagnetic flowmeter… -
Page 3: Table Of Contents
Measuring principle-specific accessories ..79 Communication-specific accessories ..80 Service-specific accessories ….81 Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 4: Safety Instructions
• The device must be operated by persons authorized and trained by the facility’ s owner- operator. Strict compliance with the instructions in the Operating Manual is mandatory. • With regard to special fluids, including fluids used for cleaning, Endress+Hauser will be happy to assist in clarifying the corrosion-resistant properties of wetted materials.
-
Page 5: Return
If the temperature of the fluid is high, implement sufficient measures to prevent burning or scalding. • The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your Endress+Hauser distributor will supply you with current information and updates to these Operating Instructions. Return The measuring device must be returned if repairs or a factory calibration are required, or if the wrong measuring device has been ordered or delivered.
-
Page 6: Identification
I-OUT (HART): with current output (HART) f-OUT (HART): with frequency output STATUS-IN: with status input (power supply) Reserved for information on special products Observe device documentation Reserved for additional information on device version (approvals, certificates) Permitted ambient temperature range Degree of protection Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 7
Reserved for information on special products Permitted ambient temperature range Observe device documentation Reserved for additional information on device version (approvals, certificates) Calibration tolerance Additional information (examples): – EPD/MSÜ: with Empty Pipe Detection electrode – R/B: with reference electrode Degree of protection Flow direction Endress+Hauser… -
Page 8: Certificates And Approvals
EMC requirements of IEC/EN 61326/A1. The measuring system described in this Operating Manual is therefore in conformity with the statutory requirements of the EC Directives. Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.
-
Page 9: Registered Trademarks
Registered trademarks of E.I. Du Pont de Nemours & Co., Wilmington, USA TRI-CLAMP® Registered trademark of Ladish & Co., Inc., Kenosha, USA ® HART Registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation, Austin, USA HistoROM™, S-DAT®, Field Xpert™, FieldCare®, Fieldcheck®, Applicator® Registered or registration-pending trademarks of Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG, Reinach, CH Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 10: Installation
At all times, therefore, make sure that the device does not unexpectedly turn around its axis or slip. a0004294 Fig. 4: Transporting sensors with DN 300 (12″) Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 11
• The measuring device must be protected against direct sunlight during storage in order to avoid unacceptably high surface temperatures. • Choose a storage location where moisture does not collect in the measuring device. This will help prevent fungus and bacteria infestation which can damage the liner. Endress+Hauser… -
Page 12: Installation Conditions
It might be necessary to install pulse dampers in systems incorporating reciprocating, diaphragm or peristaltic pumps. Information on the measuring system’ s resistance to vibration and shock can be found on → 103. A0003203 Fig. 7: Installation of pumps Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 13
This measure also prevents the system losing prime, which could cause air pockets. Information on the lining’ s resistance to partial vacuum can be found on → 107. A0008157 Fig. 9: Measures for installation in a down pipe Vent valve Pipe siphon Length of down pipe Endress+Hauser… -
Page 14
EPD electrode for the detection of empty pipes (not with Promag D and Promag H (DN 2 to 15 / 1/12 to ½»)) Measuring electrodes for signal detection Reference electrode for the potential equalization (not with Promag D and H) Endress+Hauser… -
Page 15
If vibrations are too severe, we recommend the sensor and transmitter be mounted separately. Information on resistance to vibration and shock can be found on → 103. A0003208 Fig. 13: Measures to prevent vibration of the device (L > 10 m (32.8 ft)) Endress+Hauser… -
Page 16
From the nomogram read off the pressure loss as a function of flow velocity (downstream from the reduction) and the d/D ratio. [mbar] 8 m/s 7 m/s 6 m/s 5 m/s 4 m/s max. 8° 3 m/s 2 m/s 1 m/s d / D A0011907 Fig. 15: Pressure loss due to adapters Endress+Hauser… -
Page 17
– 1250 to 40000 1250 to 40000 1400 – – – – 1700 to 55000 1600 – – – – 2200 to 70000 1800 – – – – 2800 to 90000 2000 – – – – 3400 to 110000 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 18
– – – – 9 to 300 60″ – – – – 12 to 380 66″ – – – – 14 to 500 72″ – – – – 16 to 570 78″ – – – – 18 to 650 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 19
• The maximum connecting cable length is 10 m (32.8 ft) when empty pipe detection (EPD → 76) is switched on. [µS/cm] [ft] A0010734 Fig. 16: Permissible cable length for the remote version Area shaded gray = permitted range Lmax = connecting cable length in [m] Fluid conductivity in [μS/cm] Endress+Hauser… -
Page 20: Installation Instructions
Risk of short circuit! Do not use electrically conductive sealing compounds such as graphite! An electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube and short- circuit the measuring signal. Note! Use seals with a hardness rating of 70° Shore A. Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 21
DN 80 (3″) A0010898 A0010827 A0010826 DN 100 (4″) A0012168 A0012168 A0012169 1 = Mounting bolts with centering sleeves 2 = EN (DIN) flanges: 4-hole with centering sleeves 3 = EN (DIN) flanges: 8-hole without centering sleeves Endress+Hauser… -
Page 22
4 × UNC 5/8″ × 7.50″ – * 3″ 4 × UNC 5/8″ × 9.25″ – * 4″ 8 × UNC 5/8″ × 10,4″ 5,79 * A centering sleeve is not required. The device is centered directly via the sensor housing. Endress+Hauser… -
Page 23
• If necessary, special ground cables for potential equalization can be ordered as an accessory (→ 79). • Information on potential equalization and detailed mounting instructions for the use of ground cables can be found on → 56 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 24
20 × M 24 PN 16 20 × M 30 PN 6 20 × M 24 PN 10 20 × M 27 600 * PN 16 20 × M 33 * Designed acc. to EN 1092-1 (not to DIN 2501) Endress+Hauser… -
Page 25
4 × M 16 4 × M 16 4 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 16 8 × M 20 8 × M 20 12 × M 20 12 × M 22 16 × M 22 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 26
The sensor might require support or additional attachments, depending on the application and the length of the piping run. When plastic process connections are used, the sensor must be additionally supported mechanically. A wall-mounting kit can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser as an accessory (→ 79). a0004301 Abb. 19: Promag H process connections (DN 2 to 25 / 1/12 to 1″, DN 40 to 100 / 1½… -
Page 27
• Ground rings can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser as accessories (→ 79). When placing the order, make certain that the ground ring is compatible with the material used for the electrodes. -
Page 28
If pigs are used for cleaning, it is essential to take the inside diameters of the measuring tube and process connection into account. All the dimensions and lengths of the sensor and transmitter are provided in the separate documentation «Technical Documentation» → 127. Endress+Hauser… -
Page 29
• If necessary, special ground cables for potential equalization can be ordered as an accessory (→ 79). • Information on potential equalization and detailed mounting instructions for the use of ground cables can be found on → 58. Endress+Hauser… -
Page 30
28 × M 30 1000 PN 6 28 × M 27 1000 PN 10 28 × M 33 1200 PN 6 32 × M 30 1200 PN 10 32 × M 36 * Designed acc. to EN 1092-1 (not to DIN 2501) Endress+Hauser… -
Page 31
16 × M 30 Table E 20 × M 30 Table E 20 × M 30 Table E 20 × M 30 Table E 24 × M 30 1000 Table E 24 × M 30 1200 Table E 32 × M 30 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 32
16 × M 27 PN 16 20 × M 27 PN 16 20 × M 30 PN 16 20 × M 33 PN 16 24 × M 33 1000 PN 16 24 × M 33 1200 PN 16 32 × M 33 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 33
• If necessary, special ground cables for potential equalization can be ordered as an accessory (→ 79). • Information on potential equalization and detailed mounting instructions for the use of ground cables can be found on → 56 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 34
• The tightening torques listed below apply only to pipes not subjected to tensile stress. Tightening torques for: • EN (DIN) → 35 • ASME → 35 • JIS → 36 • AS 2129 → 36 • AS 4087 → 36 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 35
4 × ½» 1″ Class 300 4 × 5/8″ 1 ½» Class 150 4 × ½» 1 ½» Class 300 4 × ¾» 2″ Class 150 4 × 5/8″ 2″ Class 300 8 × 5/8″ 3″ Class 150 4 × 5/8″ Endress+Hauser… -
Page 36
Table E 4 × M 12 Table E 4 × M 16 Promag P tightening torques for AS 4087 Nominal diameter AS 4087 Threaded Max. tightening torque [Nm] [mm] Pressure rating fasteners PTFE PN 16 4 × M 16 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 37
• Always tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence. • Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals. • The tightening torques listed below apply only to pipes not subjected to tensile stress. Endress+Hauser… -
Page 38
20 × M 24 PN 10 20 × M 27 600 * PN 16 20 × M 33 PN 25 20 × M 36 PN 6 24 × M 24 PN 10 24 × M 27 PN 16 24 × M 33 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 39
12″ Class 150 12 × 7/8″ 14″ Class 150 12 × 1″ 16″ Class 150 16 × 1″ 18″ Class 150 16 × 1 1/8″ 20″ Class 150 20 × 1 1/8″ 24″ Class 150 20 × 1 ¼» Endress+Hauser… -
Page 40
54″ Class D 44 × 1 ¾» 1500 60″ Class D 52 × 1 ¾» 1650 66″ Class D 52 × 1 ¾» 1800 72″ Class D 60 × 1 ¾» 1087 2000 78″ Class D 64 × 2″ Endress+Hauser… -
Page 41
16 × M 27 PN 16 20 × M 27 PN 16 20 × M 30 PN 16 20 × M 33 PN 16 24 × M 33 1000 PN 16 24 × M 33 1200 PN 16 32 × M 33 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 42
Turn the transmitter housing to the desired position (max. 2 × 90° in either direction). Lower the housing into position. Retighten the two securing screws. £ £ 180° 180° a0004303 Fig. 26: Turning the transmitter housing (stainless-steel field housing) Endress+Hauser… -
Page 43
Turn the display to the desired position (max. 4 × 45° in both directions) and reset it onto the cover plate of the electronics compartment. Screw the cover of the electronics compartment firmly back onto the transmitter housing. 4 x 45° a0003236 Fig. 27: Turning the local display (field housing) Endress+Hauser… -
Page 44
– Screw head: max. Ø 10.5 mm (0.41″) Secure the transmitter housing to the wall as indicated. Screw the cover of the connection compartment (a) firmly onto the housing. 35 (1.38) 90 (3.54) 192 (7.56) a0001130 Fig. 28: Mounted directly on the wall Endress+Hauser… -
Page 45
If the device is mounted to a warm pipe, make certain that the housing temperature does not exceed +60 °C (+140 °F), which is the maximum permissible temperature. Ø 20…70 (Ø 0.79…2.75) 155 ( ~ 6.1) a0001132 Fig. 30: Pipe mounting (wall-mount housing) Endress+Hauser… -
Page 46: Post-Installation Check
Inlet run 5 × DN Outlet run 2 × DN Is the measuring device protected against moisture and direct sunlight? Is the sensor adequately protected against vibration (attachment, support)? Acceleration up to 2 g by analogy with IEC 600 68-2-8 Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 47: Wiring
Warning! When connecting Ex-certified devices, see the notes and diagrams in the Ex-specific supplement to these Operating Instructions. Please do not hesitate to contact your Endress+Hauser representative if you have any questions. Note! The device does not have an internal circuit breaker. For this reason, assign the device a switch or power-breaker switch capable of disconnecting the power supply line from the mains.
-
Page 48
Connecting the remote version of Promag E/L/P/W Wall-mount housing connection compartment Cover of the sensor connection housing Signal cable Coil current cable n.c. Not connected, insulated cable shields Wire colors/Terminal No.: 5/6 = braun, 7/8 = white, 4 = green, 37/36 = yellow Endress+Hauser… -
Page 49
Connecting the remote version of Promag H Wall-mount housing connection compartment Cover of the sensor connection housing Signal cable Coil current cable n.c. Not connected, insulated cable shields Wire colors/Terminal No.: 5/6 = braun, 7/8 = white, 4 = green, 37/36 = yellow Endress+Hauser… -
Page 50
A0002687 SENSOR Signal cable Coil current cable 20 (0.79)* 20 (0.79)* 160 (6.30)* 170 (6.69)* mm (inch) mm (inch) 80 (3.15) 70 (2.76) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 17 (0.67) 8 (0.31) 10 (0.39) 8 (0.31) ³1 (0.04) A0002650 A0002646 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 51
8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) A0002684 A0002686 SENSOR Signal cable Coil current cable 80 (3.15) 70 (2.76) 15 (0.59) 17 (0.67) 15 ( 0.59 40 (1.57) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) ³ 1 (0.04) ³ mm (inch) mm (inch) A0002648 A0002647 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 52: Cable Specifications
Outer jacket Reinforced connecting cables As an option, Endress+Hauser can also deliver reinforced connecting cables with an additional, reinforcing metal braid. Reinforced connecting cables should be used when laying the cable directly in the ground, if there is a risk of damage from rodents or if using the measuring device below IP 68 degree of protection.
-
Page 53: Connecting The Measuring Unit
Terminal No. 2: N for AC, L- for DC Signal cable: Terminals Nos. 20–27 → 55 Ground terminal for protective ground Ground terminal for signal cable shield Service connector for connecting service interface FXA193 (Fieldcheck, FieldCare) Cover of the connection compartment Securing clamp Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 54
Terminal No. 2: N for AC, L- for DC Signal cable: Terminals Nos. 20–27 → 55 Ground terminal for protective ground Ground terminal for signal cable shield Service connector for connecting service interface FXA193 (Fieldcheck, FieldCare) Cover of the connection compartment Endress+Hauser… -
Page 55
See also the documentation issued by the HART Communication Foundation, and in particular HCF LIT 20: «HART, a technical summary». ³ 250 Ω a0004586 Fig. 38: Electrical connection of HART handheld Field Xpert SFX100 HART handheld Field Xpert SFX100 Auxiliary energy Shielding Other devices or PLC with passive input Endress+Hauser… -
Page 56: Potential Equalization
If using process connections made of a synthetic material, ground rings have to be used to ensure that potential is equalized (→ 27). The necessary ground rings can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser as accessories (→ 79). Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 57
• There should be no electrically conductive connection a00012174 between the pipe and the device. Fig. 42: Potential equalization and cathodic protection • The mounting material must withstand the applicable torques. Power supply isolation transformer Electrically isolated Endress+Hauser… -
Page 58
Note! The ground cable for flange-to-flange connections can be A0011893 ordered separately as an accessory from Endress+Hauser. Fig. 44: Via the ground terminal of the transmitter and the flanges of the pipe When using the measuring device in a: •… -
Page 59: Degree Of Protection
» Caution! Do not loosen the threaded fasteners of the sensor housing, as otherwise the degree of protection guaranteed by Endress+Hauser no longer applies. Note! The Promag E/L/P/W sensors can be supplied with IP 68 rating (permanent immersion in water to a depth of 3 meters (10 ft)). In this case the transmitter must be installed remote from the sensor.
-
Page 60: Post-Connection Check
Are all screw terminals firmly tightened? Have the measures for grounding/potential equalization been correctly → 56 implemented? Are all cable entries installed, firmly tightened and correctly sealed? → 59 Cables looped as «water traps»? Are all housing covers installed and firmly tightened? Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 61: Operation
– Press and hold down +/- keys for longer than 3 seconds Return directly to HOME position – Cancel data entry Enter key – HOME position Entry into the function matrix – Save the numerical values you input or settings you change Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 62: Brief Operating Instructions On The Function Matrix
– Press and hold down Esc key (X) for longer than 3 seconds HOME position – Repeatedly press Esc key (X) return step by step to HOME position > 3 s – – – – A0001142 Fig. 49: Selecting functions and configuring parameters (function matrix) Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 63: General Notes
• If programming is disabled and the P operating elements are pressed in any function, a prompt for the code automatically appears on the display. • If «0» is specified as the customer’ s code, programming is always enabled. • The Endress+Hauser service organization can be of assistance if you mislay your personal code. «…
-
Page 64: Displaying Error Messages
The response of the individual outputs (failsafe mode) can be defined in the function matrix using the «FAILSAFE MODE» function ( «Description of Device Functions» manual). Note! For security reasons, error messages should be output via the status output. Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 65: Communication
Operating program «FieldCare» FieldCare is Endress+Hauser’s FDT-based plant Asset Management Tool and allows the configuration and diagnosis of intelligent field devices. By using status information, you also have a simple but effective tool for monitoring devices. The Proline flow measuring devices are accessed via a service interface or via the service interface FXA193.
-
Page 66
The «Fieldcheck» tester/simulator is used for testing flowmeters in the field. When used in conjunction with the «FieldCare» software package, test results can be imported into a database, printed out and used for official certification. Contact your Endress+Hauser representative for more information. -
Page 67
Set HART shortform address Byte 0: desired address (0 to 15) Byte 0: active address Access type = write Factory setting: 0 Note! With an address >0 (multidrop mode), the current output of the primary process variable is set to 4 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 68
– Bytes 0-5: TAG – Bytes 0-5: TAG – Bytes 6-17: descriptor – Bytes 6-17: descriptor – Bytes 18-20: Date – Bytes 18-20: Date Write the device production Bytes 0-2: Production number Bytes 0-2: Production number number Access = write Endress+Hauser… -
Page 69
• If you change the unit of the primary process variable, this has a direct impact on the system units. Read additional device status none The device status is displayed in extended form as the Access = read response: Coding: see table → 71 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 70
This parameter sets the number of preambles The current number of preambles is displayed in the response message which are inserted in the response messages: response telegram: Byte 0: Number of preambles Access = write Byte 0: Number of preambles (4 to 20) Endress+Hauser… -
Page 71
60 seconds. Pulse buffer: The temporarily buffered flow portions (measuring mode for pulsating flow) could not be cleared or output within 60 seconds. Current output: Flow is out of range. Frequency output: Flow is out of range. Endress+Hauser… -
Page 72
Upload/download of device files. Currently no other commands are possible. Positive zero return active Simulation current output active Simulation frequency output active Simulation pulse output active Simulation status output active Simulation of the status input active Simulation of response to error (outputs) active Simulation of volume flow active Endress+Hauser… -
Page 73: Commissioning
Beginning of normal measuring mode OPERATION ▾ Normal measuring mode commences as soon as start-up completes. Various measured-value and/or status variables (HOME position) appear on the display. Note! If start-up fails, an error message indicating the cause is displayed. Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 74: Quick Setup
Width Output Output Time Signal Signal Constant Failsafe Time Failsafe Mode Constant Mode Failsafe Mode Automatic parameterization of the display Quit Quick Setup A0005413-EN Fig. 51: «QUICK SETUP COMMISSIONING» menu for the rapid configuration of important device functions Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 75: Configuration
Pay strict attention to the position of the jumpers as indicated in the graphic. Installation of the I/O board is the reverse of the removal procedure. A0001044 Fig. 52: Configuring current outputs using jumpers (I/O board) Active current output (factory setting) Passive current output Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 76: Adjustment
The adjustment values for empty pipe and full pipe are identical. In cases of this nature you must repeat empty-pipe or full-pipe adjustment! – ADJUSTMENT NOT OK Adjustment is not possible because the fluid’s conductivity is out of range. Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 77: Data Storage Device (Historom)
Commissioning Data storage device (HistoROM) At Endress+Hauser, the term HistoROM refers to various types of data storage modules on which process and measuring device data are stored. It is possible to plug these modules into other devices to copy device configurations from one device to another, for example.
-
Page 78: Maintenance
The seals of the Promag H sensor must be replaced periodically, particularly in the case of gasket seals (aseptic version). The period between changes depends on the frequency of cleaning cycles, the cleaning temperature and the fluid temperature. Replacement seals (accessories) → 79. Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 79: Accessories
Promag 50 Accessories Accessories Various accessories, which can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser, are available for the transmitter and the sensor. Your Endress+Hauser service organization can provide detailed information on the specific order codes on request. Device-specific accessories Accessory Description…
-
Page 80: Communication-Specific Accessories
SFX100 – ******* Field Xpert SFX 100 measured values via the HART current output (4 to 20 mA) and FOUNDATION Fieldbus. Contact your Endress+Hauser representative for more information. Fieldgate FXA320 Gateway for remote interrogation of HART sensors and FXA320 – ***** actuators via Web browser: •…
-
Page 81: Service-Specific Accessories
Contact your Endress+Hauser representative for more information. FieldCare FieldCare is Endress+Hauser’ s FDT-based asset management See the product page on tool. It can configure all intelligent field units in your system the Endress+Hauser and helps you manage them. By using status information, it is…
-
Page 82: Troubleshooting
No. 001 – 399 No. 501 – 699 Error number: Process error (application error) has occurred → 85 No. 401 — 499 Other error (without error message) Some other error has Diagnosis and rectification → 86 occurred. Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 83: System Error Messages
The necessary procedures on → 5 must be carried out before you return a flowmeter to Endress+Hauser. Always enclose a duly completed «Declaration of Contamination» form. You will find a master copy of this form at the back of this manual.
-
Page 84
«reciprocal value» that a pulse must be present at the connected counter to ensure its registration. Example: The maximum input frequency of the connected counter is 10 Hz. The pulse width to be entered is: = 50 ms 2 . 10 Hz a0004437 3. Reduce flow. Endress+Hauser… -
Page 85: Process Error Messages
!: # 461 conductivity is either too low or too high. FULL = EMPTY The EPD calibration values for empty pipe and full Repeat calibration, making sure procedure is correct → 76. $: # 463 pipe are identical, therefore incorrect. Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 86: Process Errors Without Messages
The following options are available for tackling problems of this nature: other fault not described above has Request the services of an Endress+Hauser service technician arisen. If you contact our service organization to have a service technician sent out, please be ready to quote the following…
-
Page 87: Response Of Outputs To Errors
Output of the frequency specified in the FALÌLSAFE VALUE function. HOLD VALUE Measured value display on the basis of the last saved value preceding occurrence of the fault. ACTUAL VALUE Measured value display on the basis of the current flow measurement. The fault is ignored. Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 88
The totalizer continues to count the flow in accordance with the last valid flow value (before the error occurred). Status output In the event of a fault or power supply failure: No effect on status output Status output non-conductive Endress+Hauser… -
Page 89: Spare Parts
Note! You can order spare parts directly from your Endress+Hauser service organization by providing the serial number printed on the transmitter’ s nameplate → 6 Spare parts are shipped as sets comprising the following parts: •…
-
Page 90
• When connecting Ex-certified devices, see the notes and diagrams in the Ex-specific supplement to these Operating Instructions. » Caution! Use only original Endress+Hauser parts. Switch off power supply. Unscrew cover of the electronics compartment from the transmitter housing. Remove the local display (1) as follows: –… -
Page 91
Field housing: removing and installing printed circuit boards Local display Latch Ribbon cable (display module) Screws of electronics compartment cover Aperture for installing/removing boards Power supply board Amplifier board Electrode signal cable (sensor) Coil current cable (sensor) Histo-ROM / S-DAT (sensor data memory) I/O board Endress+Hauser… -
Page 92
• When connecting Ex-certified devices, see the notes and diagrams in the Ex-specific supplement to these Operating Instructions. » Caution! Use only original Endress+Hauser parts. Switch off power supply. Remove the screws and open the hinged cover (1) of the housing. Remove screws of the electronics module (2). -
Page 93
Housing cover Electronics module Ribbon cable (display module) Cover of electronics compartment (3 screws) Aperture for installing/removing boards Power supply board Amplifier board Electrode signal cable (sensor) Coil current cable (sensor) Histo-ROM / S-DAT (sensor data memory) I/O board Endress+Hauser… -
Page 94
– Power supply 85 to 260 V AC 0.8 A slow-blow / 250 V; 5.2 × 20 mm – Ex-rated devices see the Ex documentation. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. » Caution! Use only original Endress+Hauser parts. a0001148 Fig. 56: Replacing the device fuse on the power supply board Protective cap… -
Page 95
View A = DN 1200 to 2000 (48 to 78″) View B = DN 350 to 1050 (14 to 42″) Allen screw Handle Electrode cable Knurled nut (locknut) Measuring electrode Stop cock (ball valve) Retaining cylinder Locking pin (for handle) Ball-valve housing Seal (retaining cylinder) Coil spring Endress+Hauser… -
Page 96
This is essential to ensure correct electrical contact and correct measuring signals. Remove the old electrode and insert the new Reinstall the cover and tighten Allen screw (a). electrode. Replacement electrodes can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser. Endress+Hauser… -
Page 97: Return
Endress+Hauser, e.g. for repair or calibration: • Always enclose a duly completed «Declaration of contamination» form. Only then can Endress+Hauser transport, examine and repair a returned device. • Enclose special handling instructions if necessary, for example a safety data sheet as per EC REACH Regulation No.
-
Page 98
1.00.00 • FieldTool • Commuwin II (version 2.05.03 and higher) • HART Communicator DXR 275 (from OS 4.6) with Rev. 1, DD1 Note! Uploads or downloads between the individual software versions are only possible with a special service software. Endress+Hauser… -
Page 99: Technical Data
– Passive: 4 to 20 mA, supply voltage V 18 to 30 V DC, R • Time constant can be selected (0.01 to 100s) • Full scale value adjustable • Temperature coefficient: typ. 0.005% o.f.s./°C, resolution: 0.5 μA o.f.s. = of full scale value Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 100: Power Supply
All circuits for inputs, outputs, and power supply are galvanically isolated from each other. 10.1.5 Power supply Electrical connections → 47 Supply voltage (power supply) • 20 to 55 V AC, 45 to 65 Hz • 85 to 260 V AC, 45 to 65 Hz • 16 to 62 V DC Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 101
• Ambient temperature: +22 ± 2 °C (+72 ± 4 °F) • Warm-up period: 30 minutes Installation: • Inlet run >10 × DN • Outlet run > 5 × DN • Sensor and transmitter grounded. • The sensor is centered in the pipe. Endress+Hauser… -
Page 102
• Transmitter: –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F) Note! At ambient temperatures below –20 (–4 °F) the readability of the display may be impaired. • Sensor (Flange material carbon steel): –10 to +60 °C (+14 to +140 °F) Endress+Hauser… -
Page 103
The maximum fluid temperature permitted for the device may not be exceeded. SIP cleaning is possible: Promag H SIP cleaning is not possible: Promag D/E/L/P/W Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) • As per IEC/EN 61326 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21 • Emission: to limit value for industry EN 55011 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 104
• –20 to +130 °C (–4 to +266 °F) for PFA/HE (DN 25 to 200 / 1 to 8″), Restrictions see the following diagrams • –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F) for PFA (DN 25 to 200 / 1 to 8″), Restrictions see the following diagrams Endress+Hauser… -
Page 105
• 0 to +80 °C (+32 to +176 °F) for hard rubber (DN 50 to 2000 / 2 to 78″) • –20 to +50 °C (–4 to +122 °F) for polyurethane (DN 25 to 1200 / 1 to 48″) Endress+Hauser… -
Page 106
– PN 10 (DN 200 to 600 / 8 to 24″) – PN 16 (DN 65 to 600 / 3 to 24″) – PN 25 (DN 200 to 600 / 8 to 24″) – PN 40 (DN 25 to 150 / 1 to 6″) Endress+Hauser… -
Page 107
[psi] [mbar] [psi] ½» 1.45 1″ 1.45 – 1.45 1 ½» 1.45 2″ 1.45 – 0.58 1.89 3″ 0.58 1.89 4″ 1.96 2.47 – 1.96 3.48 5.58 6″ 1.96 3.48 5.58 8″ 2.90 4.21 5.95 10″ 4.79 5.80 7.69 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 108
25 °C 90 °C 77 °F 194 °F [mm] [inch] [mbar] [psi] [mbar] [psi] 1″ – 1 ½» 2″ – 0.58 3″ 0.58 4″ 1.96 – 1.96 3.48 6″ 1.96 3.48 8″ 2.90 4.21 10″ 4.79 5.80 12″ 5.80 7.25 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 109
[inch] 77 °F 122 °F 176 °F 212 °F 266 °F 302 °F 356 °F 25 to 1200 1 to 40″ Polyurethane – – – – – 50 to 2000 2 to 78″ Hard rubber – – – – Endress+Hauser… -
Page 110
Promag D Weight data in kg Nominal diameter Compact version Remote version (without cable) [mm] [inch] Sensor Transmitter 1″ 1 ½» 2″ 2 ½» 3″ 4″ 10.4 Transmitter Promag (compact version): 3.4 kg (Weight data valid without packaging material) Endress+Hauser… -
Page 111
95.1 – 133.1 16″ 85.1 100.1 116.1 – 164.1 18″ 95.1 108.1 129.1 – 187.1 20″ 110.1 128.1 178.1 – 224.1 24″ 158.1 158.1 256.1 – 298.1 • Transmitter (remote version): 3.1 kg • Weight data without packaging material Endress+Hauser… -
Page 112: Weight Data In Kg
Remote version (without cable) [mm] [inch] Sensor Transmitter 1/12″ 1/8″ 3/8″ ½» 1″ 1 ½» 2″ 2 ½» 3″ 19.0 17.0 4″ 18.5 16.5 Transmitter Promag (compact version): 3.4 kg (Weight data valid for standard pressure ratings and without packaging material) Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 113
– – 90″ – – – 4797 – – 2400 – 2996 4094 – – – – Transmitter Promag (compact version): 3.1 kg (Weight data valid without packaging material) Lap joint flanges / welded flanges DN > 300 (12″) Endress+Hauser… -
Page 114
– – 90″ – – – 4795 – – 2400 – 2994 4092 – – – – Transmitter Promag (remote version): 3.4 kg (Weight data valid without packaging material) Lap joint flanges / welded flanges DN > 300 (12″) Endress+Hauser… -
Page 115
16″ 18″ 20″ 24″ Transmitter Promag (compact version): 3.4 kg High-temperature version: + 1.5 kg (Weight data valid for standard pressure ratings and without packaging material) * Flanges according to AS are only available for DN 25 and 50. Endress+Hauser… -
Page 116
– 2800 – 2798 – Transmitter Promag (compact version): 3.4 kg (Weight data valid for standard pressure ratings and without packaging material) *Flanges according to AS are only available for DN 80, 100, 150 to 400, 500 and 600 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 117
Compact version Remote version (without cable) [mm] [inch] Sensor Transmitter 1/12″ 1/8″ 3/8″ ½» 1″ 1 ½» 2″ 2 ½» 3″ 4″ Transmitter Promag (compact version): 7.5 lbs (Weight data valid for standard pressure ratings and without packaging material) Endress+Hauser… -
Page 118: Promag
– – – – 90″ 10577 10573 2400 – – – Transmitter Promag (compact version): 4.0 lbs Transmitter Promag (remote version): 6.8 lbs (Weight data valid without packaging material) Lap joint flanges / welded flanges DN > 300 (12″) Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 119: Transmitter
Sensor Transmitter ½» 1″ 1 ½» 2″ 3″ 4″ 6″ 8″ 10″ 12″ 14″ 16″ 18″ 20″ 24″ Transmitter Promag (compact version): 7.5 lbs High-temperature version: 3.3 lbs (Weight data valid for standard pressure ratings and without packaging material) Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 120
Promag D • Transmitter housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum • Sensor housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum • Measuring tube: polyamide, O-rings EPDM (Drinking water approvals: WRAS BS 6920, ACS, NSF 61, KTW/W270) • Electrodes: 1.4435 (316, 316L) • Ground disks: 1.4301 (304) Endress+Hauser… -
Page 121
• Transmitter housing: – Compact housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum – Wall-mounted housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum • Sensor housing – DN 25 to 300 (1 to 12″): powder-coated die-cast aluminum – DN 350 to 1200 (14 to 48″): with protective lacquering Endress+Hauser… -
Page 122
• Transmitter housing: – Compact housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum – Wall-mounted housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum • Sensor housing – DN 25 to 300 (1 to 12″): powder-coated die-cast aluminum – DN 350 to 2000 (14 to 84″): with protective lacquering Endress+Hauser… -
Page 123
• 1 reference electrode for potential equalization Promag H • 2 measuring electrodes for signal detection • 1 EPD electrode for empty pipe detection (apart from DN 2 to 15) Process connections Promag D Wafer version without process connections Endress+Hauser… -
Page 124
• Electrodes: 0.3 to 0.5 μm (12 to 20 μin) • Process connection made of stainless-steel (Promag H): – with O-ring seal: 1.6 μm (63 μin) – with aseptic gasket seal: 0.8 μm (31.5 μin) – optional: 0.38 μm (15 μin) Endress+Hauser… -
Page 125
CE mark The measuring system is in conformity with the statutory requirements of the EC Directives. Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark. C-tick mark The measuring system meets the EMC requirements of the «Australian Communications and Media Authority (ACMA)». -
Page 126
DN 25 (1″), this is neither possible nor necessary. • With the PED/G1/x (x = category) marking on the sensor nameplate, Endress+Hauser confirms compliance with the «Essential Safety Requirements» specified in Annex I of the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC. -
Page 127: Ordering Information
10.1.13 Ordering information Detailed ordering information is available from the following sources: • In the Product Configurator on the Endress+Hauser website: www.endress.com → Select country → Instruments → Select device → Product page function: Configure this product • From your Endress+Hauser Sales Center: www.endress.com/worldwide…
-
Page 128: Index
Down pipe……..13 Empty-pipe/full-pipe adjustment ….76 Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 129
Registered trademarks ……9 Pig (cleaning) ……..28 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 130
Troubleshooting ……. . . 82 Types of error (system and process errors) … 64 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 131
Promag 50 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 132
www.addresses.endress.com…
-
Contents
-
Table of Contents
-
Bookmarks
Quick Links
BA046D/06/en/10.03
50097090
Valid as of software version:
V 1.06.XX (amplifier)
V 1.03.XX (communication)
PROline promag 50
Electromagnetic
Flow Measuring System
Operating Instructions
Related Manuals for Endress+Hauser PROline promag 50
Summary of Contents for Endress+Hauser PROline promag 50
-
Page 1
PROline promag 50 BA046D/06/en/10.03 50097090 Electromagnetic Valid as of software version: V 1.06.XX (amplifier) V 1.03.XX (communication) Flow Measuring System Operating Instructions… -
Page 2
Brief operating instructions PROline Promag 50 Brief operating instructions These brief operating instructions show you how to configure the measuring device quickly and easily: Safety instructions Page 7 ▼ Installation Page 13 ▼ Page 47 Wiring ▼ Display and operating elements Page 61 ▼… -
Page 3
PROline Promag 50 “QUICK SETUP” commissioning “QUICK SETUP” commissioning ENDRESS+HAUSER Quick Setup Commission Language HOME-POSITION Defaults Unit Volume flow Measuring Mode Current Output Freq.-/ Pulse Output Quit Operation Mode Frequency Pulse Assign Assign Assign Current Frequency Pulse Current End Value… -
Page 4
“QUICK SETUP” commissioning PROline Promag 50 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 5: Table Of Contents
PROline Promag 50 Contents Contents Safety instructions Operation ……… .
-
Page 6
Contents PROline Promag 50 10.1.11 Ordering information … 119 10.1.12 Accessories ….119 10.1.13 Supplementary documentation . -
Page 7: Safety Instructions
Strict compliance with the instructions in the Operating Manual is mandatory. • Endress+Hauser will be happy to assist in clarifying the chemical resistance proper- ties of parts wetted by special fluids, including fluids used for cleaning. • If welding work is performed on the piping system, do not ground the welding appli- ance through the Promag flowmeter.
-
Page 8: Return
Endress+Hauser: • Always enclose a duly completed “Declaration of contamination” form. Only then can Endress+Hauser transport, examine and repair a returned device. • Enclose special handling instructions if necessary, for example a safety data sheet as per EN 91/155/EEC.
-
Page 9: Identification
PROline Promag 50 2 Identification Identification Device designation The “Promag 50” flow measuring system consists of the following components: • Promag 50 transmitter • Promag W, Promag P or Promag H sensor In the compact version, transmitter and sensor form a single mechanical unit; in the remote version they are installed separately.
-
Page 10: Nameplate Of The Sensor
EMC reqiurements of EN 61326/A1. The measuring system described in this Operating Manual is therefore in conformity with the statutory requirements of the EC Directives. Endress+Hauser confirms suc- cessful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.
-
Page 11: Registered Trademarks
Ladish & Co., Inc., Kenosha, USA ® HART is a registered trademark of HART Communication Foundation, Austin, USA S-DAT ™, FieldTool ™, FieldCheck ™, Applicator ™ are registered trademarks of Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG, Reinach, CH Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 12
2 Identification PROline Promag 50 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 13: Installation
PROline Promag 50 3 Installation Installation Incoming acceptance, transport and storage 3.1.1 Incoming acceptance • Check the packaging and the contents for damage. • Check the shipment, make sure nothing is missing and that the scope of supply matches your order.
-
Page 14: Storage
3 Installation PROline Promag 50 ≥ Transporting flanged devices (DN 350): Use only the metal eyes on the flanges for transporting the device, lifting it and position- ing the sensor in the piping. » Caution! Do not attempt to lift the sensor with the tines of a fork-lift truck beneath the metal casing.
-
Page 15: Installation Conditions
PROline Promag 50 3 Installation Installation conditions 3.2.1 Dimensions Dimensions and the fitting lengths of the transmitter and sensor are on Page 122 ff. 3.2.2 Mounting location Correct measuring is possible only if the pipe is full. Avoid the following locations: •…
-
Page 16
3 Installation PROline Promag 50 Partially filled pipes Partially filled pipes with gradients necessitate a drain-type configuration. The Empty Pipe Detection function (see Page 81) offers additional protection by detecting empty or partially filled pipes. » Caution! Risk of solids accumulating. Do not install the sensor at the lowest point in the drain. -
Page 17: Orientation
PROline Promag 50 3 Installation 3.2.3 Orientation An optimum orientation position helps avoid gas and air accumulations and deposits in the measuring tube. Promag, nevertheless, supplies a range of functions and accesso- ries for correct measuring of problematic fluids: • Electrode Cleaning Circuit (ECC) for applications with accretive fluids, e.g. electrically conductive deposits →…
-
Page 18: Vibrations
3 Installation PROline Promag 50 Inlet and outlet runs If possible, install the sensor well clear of fittings such as valves, T-pieces, elbows, etc. Compliance with the following requirements for the inlet and outlet runs is necessary in order to ensure measuring accuracy.
-
Page 19: Foundations, Supports
PROline Promag 50 3 Installation 3.2.5 Foundations, supports If the nominal diameter is DN ≥ 350, mount the transmitter on a foundation of adequate load-bearing strength. » Caution! Risk of damage. Do not support the weight of the sensor on the metal casing: the casing would buckle and damage the internal magnetic coils.
-
Page 20: Adapters
3 Installation PROline Promag 50 3.2.6 Adapters Suitable adapters to (E) DIN EN 545 (double-flange reducers) can be used to install the sensor in larger-diameter pipes. The resultant increase in the rate of flow improves measuring accuracy with very slow-moving fluids.
-
Page 21
PROline Promag 50 3 Installation Promag W Flow rate characteristic values – Promag W (SI units) Nominal Recommended Factory setting diameter flow rate min./max. full scale value Full scale value Pulse value Low flow cutoff [mm] [inch] (v ~ 0.3 or 10 m/s) (v ~ 2.5 m/s) -
Page 22
3 Installation PROline Promag 50 Flow rate characteristic values – Promag W (US units) Nominal diameter Recommended Factory setting flow rate min./max. full scale value Full scale value Pulse value Low flow cutoff [inch] [mm] (v ~ 0.3 or 10 m/s) (v ~ 2.5 m/s) -
Page 23
PROline Promag 50 3 Installation Promag P Flow rate characteristic values – Promag P (SI units) Nominal Recommended Factory setting diameter flow rate min./max. full scale value Full scale value Pulse value Low flow cutoff [mm] [inch] (v ~ 0.3 or 10 m/s) (v ~ 2.5 m/s) -
Page 24
3 Installation PROline Promag 50 Flow rate characteristic values – Promag P (US units) Nominal diameter Recommended Factory setting flow rate min./max. full scale value Full scale value Pulse value Low flow cutoff [inch] [mm] (v ~ 0.3 or ~ 10 m/s) (v ~ 2.5 m/s) -
Page 25: Length Of Connecting Cable
PROline Promag 50 3 Installation Flow rate characteristic values – Promag H (US units) Nominal diameter Recommended Factory settings flow rate min./max. full scale value Full scale value Pulse value Low flow cutoff [inch] [mm] (v ~ 0.3 or 10 m/s) (v ~ 2.5 m/s)
-
Page 26: Installation Instructions
3 Installation PROline Promag 50 Installation instructions 3.3.1 Installing the Promag W sensor Note! Bolts, nuts, seals, etc. are not included in the scope of supply and must be supplied by the customer. The sensor is designed for installation between the two piping flanges: •…
-
Page 27
PROline Promag 50 3 Installation Assembly with ground disks (DN 25…300) Depending on the application, e.g. with lined or ungrounded pipes (see Page 56 ff.), it may be necessary to mount ground disks between the sensor and the pipe flange for potential equalisation. -
Page 28
3 Installation PROline Promag 50 Screw tightening torques (Promag W) Note the following points: • The tightening torques listed below are for lubricated threads only. • Always tighten threaded fasteners uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence. • Overtightening the fasteners will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals. -
Page 29
PROline Promag 50 3 Installation Promag W EN (DIN) Threaded Max. tightening torque [Nm] Nominal diameter Pressure rating fasteners [mm] [bar] Hard rubber Polyurethane PN 16 20 x M 30 PN 25 20 x M 33 PN 10 20 x M 27… -
Page 30
3 Installation PROline Promag 50 Promag W AWWA Threaded Max. tightening torque [Nm] Nominal diameter Pressure rating fasteners [mm] [inch] Hard rubber Polyurethane 28″ Class D 28 x 1 1/4″ 30″ Class D 28 x 1 1/4 32″ Class D 28 x 1 1/2″… -
Page 31
PROline Promag 50 3 Installation Promag W Threaded Max. tightening torque [Nm] Nominal diameter Pressure rating fasteners [mm] Hard rubber Polyurethane − 4 x M 16 − 4 x M 16 − 4 x M 16 − 4 x M 16 −… -
Page 32: Installing The Promag P Sensor
3 Installation PROline Promag 50 3.3.2 Installing the Promag P sensor » Caution! • The protective covers mounted on the two sensor flanges guard the PTFE lining, which is turned over the flanges. Consequently, do not remove these covers until immediately before the sensor is installed in the pipe.
-
Page 33
PROline Promag 50 3 Installation Assembly with ground disks (DN 15…300) Depending on the application, e.g. with lined or ungrounded pipes (see Page 56 ff.), it may be necessary to mount ground disks between the sensor and the pipe flange for the potential equalisation. -
Page 34
3 Installation PROline Promag 50 Installing the high-temperature version (with PFA lining) The high-temperature version has a housing support for the thermal separation of sensor and transmitter. The high-temperature version is always used for applications in which high ambient temperatures are encountered in conjunction with high fluid temperatures. -
Page 35
PROline Promag 50 3 Installation Tightening torques for threaded fasteners (Promag P) Note the following points: • The tightening torques listed below are for lubricated threads only. • Always tighten threaded fasteners uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence. • Overtightening the fasteners will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals. -
Page 36
3 Installation PROline Promag 50 Promag P EN (DIN) Threaded Max. tightening torque [Nm] Nominal diameter Pressure rating fasteners [mm] [bar] PTFE − PN 25 20 x M 33 − PN 10 20 x M 27 − 600 * PN 16 20 x M 33 −… -
Page 37
PROline Promag 50 3 Installation Promag P Threaded Max. tightening torque [Nm] Nominal diameter Pressure rating fasteners [mm] PTFE − 4 x M 12 − 4 x M 12 − 4 x M 16 − 4 x M 16 −… -
Page 38: Installing The Promag H Sensor
3 Installation PROline Promag 50 3.3.3 Installing the Promag H sensor The Promag H is supplied to order, with or without pre-installed process connections. Pre-installed process connections are secured to the sensor with hex-head threaded fasteners. » Caution! • If you intend using your own process connections, make up the process adapters as specified on Page 137 ff.
-
Page 39
PROline Promag 50 3 Installation Usage and assembly of ground rings (DN 2…25) In case the process connections are made of plastic (e.g. flanges or adhesive fittings), the potential between the sensor and the fluid must be equalised using additional ground rings. -
Page 40
3 Installation PROline Promag 50 Welding the sensor into the piping (weld nipples) » Caution! Risk of destroying the measuring electronics. Make sure that the welding machine is not grounded via the sensor or the transmitter. Tack-weld the Promag H sensor into the pipe. A suitable welding jig can be ordered separately from E+H as an accessory (see Page 85). -
Page 41: Turning The Transmitter Housing
PROline Promag 50 3 Installation 3.3.4 Turning the transmitter housing Turning the aluminum field housing Warning! The turning mechanism in devices with EEx d/de or FM/CSA Cl. I Div. 1 classification is not the same as that described here. The procedure for turning these housings is described in the Ex-specific documentation.
-
Page 42: Turning The Local Display
3 Installation PROline Promag 50 3.3.5 Turning the local display Remove the cover of the electronics compartment. Press the side latches on the display module and remove it from the electronics compartment cover plate. Rotate the display to the desired position (max. 4 x 45° in each direction), and place it back into the electronics compartment cover plate.
-
Page 43: Installing The Wall-Mount Transmitter Housing
PROline Promag 50 3 Installation 3.3.6 Installing the wall-mount transmitter housing There are various ways of installing the wall-mount transmitter housing: • Mounted directly on the wall • Installation in control panel (with separate mounting kit, accessories → Page 85) •…
-
Page 44
3 Installation PROline Promag 50 Panel installation Prepare the opening in the panel (Fig. 27). Slide the housing into the opening in the panel from the front. Screw the fasteners onto the wall-mount housing. Place the threaded rods in the fasteners and screw them down until the housing is seated tightly against the panel. -
Page 45: Installation Check
PROline Promag 50 3 Installation Installation check Perform the following checks after installing the measuring device in the pipe: Device condition and specifications Notes − Is the device damaged (visual inspection)? Does the device correspond to specifications at the measuring point, see Page 107 ff.
-
Page 46
3 Installation PROline Promag 50 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 47: Wiring
PROline Promag 50 4 Wiring Wiring Warning! • When connecting Ex-certified devices, see the notes and diagrams in the Ex-specific supplement to this Operating Manual. Please do not hesitate to contact your E+H rep- resentative if you have any questions.
-
Page 48
4 Wiring PROline Promag 50 Electrode circuit Coil circuit Pipe Meas.signal S1 E1 E2 S2 GND E S n.c. n.c. n.c. E1 E2 GND E Fig. 29: Connecting the remote version of Promag W/P a = cover of the connection compartment, b = cover of the sensor connection housing, c = signal cable, d = coil current cable, n.c. -
Page 49
PROline Promag 50 4 Wiring Cable termination for the remote version Promag W / Promag P Terminate the signal and coil current cables as shown in the figure below (Detail A). Fit the fine-wire cores with cable end sleeves (Detail B). -
Page 50
4 Wiring PROline Promag 50 Cable termination for the remote version Promag H Terminate the signal and coil current cables as shown in the figure below (Detail A). Fit the fine-wire cores with cable end sleeves (Detail B). » Caution! When fitting the connectors, pay attention to the following points: →… -
Page 51: Cable Specifications
PROline Promag 50 4 Wiring 4.1.2 Cable specifications Coil cable: • 2 x 0.75 mm PVC cable with common, braided copper shield (Ø approx. 7 mm) • Conductor resistance: ≤ 37 Ω/km • Capacitance: core/core, shield grounded: ≤ 120 pF/m •…
-
Page 52: Connecting The Measuring Unit
4 Wiring PROline Promag 50 Connecting the measuring unit 4.2.1 Connecting the transmitter Warning! • Risk of electric shock. Switch off the power supply before opening the device. Do not install or wire the device while it is connected to the power supply. Failure to comply with this precaution can result in irreparable damage to the electronics.
-
Page 53
PROline Promag 50 4 Wiring – 27 + 26 – 25 + 24 – 23 + 22 – 21 + 20 N (L-) L1 (L+) Fig. 33: Connecting the transmitter (stainless-steel field housing). Cable cross-section: max. 2.5 mm Cable for power supply: 85…260 V AC, 20…55 V AC, 16…62 V DC Terminal No. -
Page 54: Terminal Assignment
4 Wiring PROline Promag 50 4.2.2 Terminal assignment Terminal No. (inputs / outputs) Order variant 20 (+) / 21 (–) 22 (+) / 23 (–) 24 (+) / 25 (–) 26 (+) / 27 (–) Current output − − −…
-
Page 55: Hart Connection
PROline Promag 50 4 Wiring 4.2.3 HART connection Users have the following connection options at their disposal: • Direct connection to transmitter by means of terminals 26 / 27 • Connection by means of the 4…20 mA circuit Note! • The measuring loop’s minimum load must be at least 250 Ω.
-
Page 56: Potential Equalisation
4 Wiring PROline Promag 50 Potential equalisation 4.3.1 Standard case Perfect measurement is only ensured when the medium and the sensor have the same electrical potential. Most Promag sensors have a standard installed reference electrode which guarantees the required connection. This usually means that additional potential matching measures are unnecessary.
-
Page 57: Special Cases
PROline Promag 50 4 Wiring 4.3.2 Special cases Metal, ungrounded piping In order to prevent outside influences on measurement, it is advisable to use ground cables to connect each sensor flange to its corresponding pipe flange and ground the flanges. Connect the transmitter or sensor connection housing, as applicable, to ground potential by means of the ground terminal provided for the purpose (Fig.
-
Page 58
4 Wiring PROline Promag 50 Plastic pipes and isolating lined pipes Normally, potential is matched using the reference electrodes in the measuring tube. However, in exceptional cases it is possible that, due to the grounding plan of a system, large matching cur-rents flow over the reference electrodes. This can lead to destruction of the sensor, e.g. -
Page 59: Degree Of Protection
Caution! Do not loosen the threaded fasteners of the Promag sensor housing, as otherwise the degree of protection guaranteed by Endress+Hauser no longer applies. Note! The Promag W and Promag P sensors can be supplied with IP 68 rating (permanent immersion in water to a depth of 3 meters).
-
Page 60: Electical Connection Check
4 Wiring PROline Promag 50 Electical connection check Perform the following checks after completing electrical installation of the measuring device: Device condition and specifications Notes − Are cables or the device damaged (visual inspection)? Electrical connection Notes Does the supply voltage match the specifications on the nameplate? 85…260 V AC (45…65 Hz)
-
Page 61: Operation
PROline Promag 50 5 Operation Operation Display and operating elements The local display enables you to read all important parameters directly at the measuring point and configure the device. The display area consists of two lines; this is where measured values are displayed, and/or status variables (direction of flow, partially filled pipe, bar graph, etc.).
-
Page 62: Brief Operating Instruction To The Function Matrix
5 Operation PROline Promag 50 Brief operating instruction to the function matrix Note! • See the general notes on Page 63. • Function descriptions → see the “Description of Device Functions” manual HOME position → F → Enter the function matrix Select a function group (e.g.
-
Page 63: General Notes
There is no need to change these parameters under normal circumstances and conse- quently, they are protected by a special code known only to the E+H service organiza- tion. Please contact Endress+Hauser if you have any questions. Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 64: Disabling The Programming Mode
5 Operation PROline Promag 50 5.2.3 Disabling the programming mode Programming is disabled if you do not press a key within 60 seconds following automatic return to the HOME position. You can also disable programming in the “ACCESS CODE” function by entering any number (other than the customer’s code).
-
Page 65: Communication (Hart)
PROline Promag 50 5 Operation Communication (HART) In addition to local operation, the measuring device can be configured and measured values can be obtained by means of the HART protocol. Digital communication takes place using the 4–20 mA current output HART (see Page 55).
-
Page 66: Device And Process Variables
5 Operation PROline Promag 50 You can find more information on FieldTool in the following E+H document: System Information: SI 031D/06/en “FieldTool” Other operating programs • Operating program “AMS” (Fisher Rosemount) • Operating program “SIMATIC PDM” (Siemens) Note! The HART protocol requires the “4–20 mA HART” or “4–20 mA (25 mA) HART” setting in the CURRENT SPAN function.
-
Page 67: Universal / Common Practice Hart Commands
PROline Promag 50 5 Operation 5.4.3 Universal / Common practice HART commands The following table contains all the universal and common practice commands supported by Promag 50. Command No. Command data Response data HART command / Access type (numeric data in decimal form)
-
Page 68
5 Operation PROline Promag 50 Command No. Command data Response data HART command / Access type (numeric data in decimal form) (numeric data in decimal form) Read the primary process none 24 bytes are sent as a response: variable as current in mA and –… -
Page 69
PROline Promag 50 5 Operation Command No. Command data Response data HART command / Access type (numeric data in decimal form) (numeric data in decimal form) Read TAG, descriptor and none – Bytes 0-5: TAG date – Bytes 6-17: descriptor –… -
Page 70
5 Operation PROline Promag 50 Command No. Command data Response data HART command / Access type (numeric data in decimal form) (numeric data in decimal form) Write TAG, descriptor and With this parameter, you can store an 8 charac- Displays the current information in the device:… -
Page 71
PROline Promag 50 5 Operation Command No. Command data Response data HART command / Access type (numeric data in decimal form) (numeric data in decimal form) Write unit of primary process Set unit of primary process variable. Only unit The current unit code of the primary process… -
Page 72
5 Operation PROline Promag 50 Command No. Command data Response data HART command / Access type (numeric data in decimal form) (numeric data in decimal form) Write assignments of the Setting of the device variables to the four The variable assignment of the process varia-… -
Page 73: Device Status / Error Messages
PROline Promag 50 5 Operation 5.4.4 Device status / Error messages You can read the extended device status, in this case, current error messages, via Com- mand “48”. The command delivers information which are partly coded in bits (see table below).
-
Page 74
5 Operation PROline Promag 50 → Byte Error No. Short error description ( Page 88 ff. ) not assigned – not assigned – not assigned – Internal communication fault on the measuring amplifier No data reception between amplifier and I/O board not assigned –… -
Page 75
PROline Promag 50 5 Operation → Byte Error No. Short error description ( Page 88 ff. ) not assigned – not assigned – not assigned – not assigned – not assigned – not assigned – not assigned – not assigned –… -
Page 76
5 Operation PROline Promag 50 → Byte Error No. Short error description ( Page 88 ff. ) not assigned – not assigned – not assigned – not assigned – not assigned – not assigned – not assigned – not assigned –… -
Page 77
PROline Promag 50 5 Operation → Byte Error No. Short error description ( Page 88 ff. ) Simulation status input active Simulation status input active Simulation status input active Simulation of response to error (outputs) active Simulation of volume flow active not assigned –… -
Page 78
5 Operation PROline Promag 50 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 79: Commissioning
PROline Promag 50 6 Commissioning Commissioning Function check Make sure that all final checks have been completed before you start up your measuring point: • Checklist for “Installation check” → Page 45 • Checklist for “Electrical connection check” → Page 60 Commissioning 6.2.1…
-
Page 80: Commissioning» Quick Setup Menu
6 Commissioning PROline Promag 50 6.2.2 “Commissioning” Quick Setup menu This Quick Setup menu guides you systematically through the setup procedure for all the major device functions that have to be configured for standard measuring operation. Note! In the case of measuring devices without a local display, the individual parameters and functions must be configured by means of a configuration program, such as FieldTool from E+H.
-
Page 81: Empty-Pipe/Full-Pipe Adjustment
PROline Promag 50 6 Commissioning 6.2.3 Empty-pipe/full-pipe adjustment Flow cannot be measured correctly unless the measuring tube is completely full. This status can be permanently monitored using the Empty Pipe Detection: • EPD = Empty Pipe Detection (with the help of an EPD electrode) •…
-
Page 82: Current Output: Active/Passive
6 Commissioning PROline Promag 50 6.2.4 Current output: active/passive The current output is configured as “active” or “passive” by means of various jumpers on the I/O board. Warning! • Risk of electric shock. Exposed components carry dangerous voltages. Make sure that the power supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics compartment.
-
Page 83: Maintenance
PROline Promag 50 7 Maintenance Maintenance The Promag 50 flow measuring system requires no special maintenance. Exterior cleaning When cleaning the exterior of measuring devices, always use cleaning agents that do not attack the surface of the housing and the seals.
-
Page 84: 7 Maintenance
7 Maintenance PROline Promag 50 Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 85: Accessories
PROline Promag 50 8 Accessories Accessories Various accessories, which can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser, are avail- able for the transmitter and the sensor. The E+H service organisation can provide detailed information on the order codes of your choice. Accessory…
-
Page 86
8 Accessories PROline Promag 50 Accessory Description Order code − HART Communicator Hand-held terminal for remote parameterisa- DXR375 * * * * DXR 375 hand-held tion and for fetching measured values via the terminal current output HART (4…20 mA). Contact your E+H representative for more information. -
Page 87: Trouble-Shooting
PROline Promag 50 9 Trouble-shooting Trouble-shooting Trouble-shooting instructions Always start trouble-shooting with the checklist below, if faults occur after start-up or during operation. The routine takes you directly to the cause of the problem and the appropriate remedial measures. Check the display →…
-
Page 88: System Error Messages
9 Trouble-shooting PROline Promag 50 System error messages Serious system errors are always recognised by the instrument as “Fault message”, and are shown as a lightning flash ( $) on the display. Fault messages immediately affect the inputs and outputs. Simulations and positive zero return, on the other hand, are classed and displayed as notice messages.
-
Page 89
PROline Promag 50 9 Trouble-shooting Type Error message / No. Cause Remedy / spare part SENSOR SW DAT Sensor: 1. Check whether the S-DAT is # 032 Error accessing the calibration correctly plugged into the → values stored in the S-DAT. -
Page 90
9 Trouble-shooting PROline Promag 50 Type Error message / No. Cause Remedy / spare part → No. # 3xx System limits exceeded TOL. COIL CURR. Sensor: 1. Remote version: # 321 Coil current is out of tolerance. Switch off the power supply… -
Page 91
PROline Promag 50 9 Trouble-shooting Type Error message / No. Cause Remedy / spare part PULSE RANGE n Pulse output: 1. Increase the setting for pulse # 359…362 Pulse output frequency is out of weighting range. 2. When selecting the pulse… -
Page 92: Process Error Messages
9 Trouble-shooting PROline Promag 50 Type Error message / No. Cause Remedy / spare part SIM. FAILSAFE Simulation of response to error Switch off simulation # 691 (outputs) active SIM. VOL. FLOW Simulation of volume flow active Switch off simulation # 692 DEV.
-
Page 93: Process Errors Without Messages
Returning devices to E+H The procedures on Page 8 must be carried out before you return a flow- meter requiring repair or calibration to Endress+Hauser. Always enclose a duly completed “Declaration of Conformity” form with the flowmeter. You will find a preprinted form at the back of this manual.
-
Page 94: Response Of Outputs To Errors
9 Trouble-shooting PROline Promag 50 Response of outputs to errors Note! The failsafe mode of totalizers, current, pulse and frequency outputs can be customized by means of various functions in the function matrix. You will find detailed information on these procedures in the “Description of Device Functions” manual.
-
Page 95
PROline Promag 50 9 Trouble-shooting Failsafe mode of outputs and totalizers Process/system error is current Positive zero return is activated Frequency output FALLBACK VALUE Output signal corresponds to → Signal output 0 Hz “zero flow” FAILSAFE LEVEL Output of the frequency specified in the FALÌLSAFE VALUE function. -
Page 96: Spare Parts
9 Trouble-shooting PROline Promag 50 Spare parts Chap. 9.1 contains a detailed trouble-shooting guide. The measuring device, moreover, provides additional support in the form of continuous self-diagnosis and error messages. Fault rectification can entail replacing defective components with tested spare parts.
-
Page 97: Removing And Installing Printed Circuit Boards
– Insert a thin pin into the hole (3) provided for the purpose and pull the board clear of its holder. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. » Caution! Use only original Endress+Hauser parts. Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 98
9 Trouble-shooting PROline Promag 50 Fig. 48: Field housing: removing and installing printed circuit boards Local display Latch Ribbon cable (display module) Screws of electronics compartment cover Aperture for tool, removal/installation Power supply board Amplifier board Electrode signal cable (sensor) -
Page 99
Remove the boards (6, 7, 8): Insert a suitable tool into the hole (5) provided for the purpose and pull the board clear of its holder. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. » Caution! Use only original Endress+Hauser parts. Endress+Hauser… -
Page 100
9 Trouble-shooting PROline Promag 50 Fig. 49: Wall-mounted housing: removing and installing printed circuit boards Housing cover Electronics module Ribbon cable (display module) Cover of electronics compartment (3 screws) Aperture for tool, removal/installation Power supply board Amplifier board Electrode signal cable (sensor) -
Page 101: Replacing The Device Fuse
– Power supply 85…260 V AC → 0.8 A slow-blow / 250 V; 5.2 x 20 mm – Ex-rated devices → see the Ex documentation. Assembly is the reverse of the disassembly procedure. » Caution! Use only original Endress+Hauser parts. Fig. 50: Replacing the device fuse on the power supply board Protective cap Device fuse…
-
Page 102: Replacing Exchangeable Measuring Electrodes
9 Trouble-shooting PROline Promag 50 Replacing exchangeable measuring electrodes The Promag W sensor (DN 350…2000) is available with exchangeable measuring elec- trodes as an option. This design permits the measuring electrodes to be replaced or cleaned under process conditions (see Page 103).
-
Page 103
PROline Promag 50 9 Trouble-shooting Removing the electrode Installing the electrode Loosen Allen screw (a) and remove the Insert new electrode (e) into retaining cylin- cover. der (g) from below. Make sure that the seals at the tip of the electrode are clean. -
Page 104: Software History
9 Trouble-shooting PROline Promag 50 9.10 Software history Software version / Changes to software Changes to documentation date Amplifier: − V 1.00.00 / 04.2000 Original software. Compatible with: – FieldTool – Commuwin II (version 2.05.03 and higher) – HART Communicator DXR 275 (from OS 4.6) with Rev.
-
Page 105
PROline Promag 50 9 Trouble-shooting V 1.02.01 / 08.2003 Software expansion: Special documentation: New / revised functionalities • Current span NAMUR NE 43 • Failsafe mode function • Trouble-shooting function • System and process error messages • Response of status output V 1.03.00 / 10.2003… -
Page 106
9 Trouble-shooting PROline Promag 50 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 107: Technical Data
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data Technical data 10.1 Technical data at a glance 10.1.1 Application Application • Measuring the flow rate of fluids in closed piping systems. • A minimum conductivity of ≥ 5 µS/cm is required for measuring; the minimum conductivity required in the case of demineralised water is ≥…
-
Page 108: Output
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 10.1.4 Output Output signal Current output: active/passive selectable, galvanically isolated, time constant selectable (0.01…100 s), full scale value selectable, temperature coefficient: typically 0.005% o.f.s./ °C; resolution: 0.5 µA < 700 Ω (for HART: R ≥…
-
Page 109: Performance Characteristics
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data Power consumption AC: <15 VA (including sensor) DC: <15 W (including sensor) Switch-on current: • max. 13.5 A (< 50 ms) at 24 V DC • max. 3 A (< 5 ms) at 260 V AC Power supply failure Lasting min.
-
Page 110: Operating Conditions
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 10.1.7 Operating conditions Installation Installation instructions Any orientation (vertical, horizontal) Restrictions and additional installation instructions → see Page 15 ff. Inlet run: typically ≥ 5 x DN Inlet and outlet runs Outlet run: typically ≥ 2 x DN…
-
Page 111
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data Process Medium temperature The permissible fluid temperature depends on the lining of the measuring tube: range Promag W 0…+80 °C for hard rubber (DN 65…2000) –20…+50 °C for polyurethane (DN 25…2000) Promag P –40…+130 °C for PTFE (DN 15…600), for restrictions → refer to diagrams –20…+180 °C for PFA (DN 25…200), for restrictions →… -
Page 112
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 Promag H Sensor: • DN 2…25: –20…+150 °C • DN 40…100: –20…+150 °C Seal: • EPDM: –20…+130 °C • Silicone: –20…+150 °C • Viton: –20…+150 °C • Kalrez: –20…+150 °C Conductivity Minimum conductivity: • ≥ 5 µS/cm for fluids generally •… -
Page 113
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data Pressure tightness Promag W Measuring Resistance of measuring tube lining to partial vacuum (liner) Nominal diameter tube lining Limit values for abs. pressure [mbar] at various fluid temperatures [mm] [inch] 25 °C 70 °C 80°… -
Page 114: Mechanical Construction
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 10.1.8 Mechanical construction Design / dimensions see Page 122 ff. Weight Weight data of Promag W in kg Nominal Compact version Remote versin (without cable) diameter Sensor Wall housing [mm] [inch] EN (DIN) ANSI/AWWA…
-
Page 115
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data Weight data of Promag P in kg Nominal Compact version Remote version (without cable) diameter Sensor Wall housing [mm] [inch] EN (DIN) ANSI EN (DIN) ANSI 1/2″ 1″ 1 1/4″ – – 1 1/2″… -
Page 116
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 Materials Promag W Transmitter housing: • Compact housing: powder coated die-cast aluminium or stainless steel field housing (1.4301/316L) • Wall-mounted housing: powder coated die-cast aluminium Sensor housing: • DN 25…300: powder-coated die-cast aluminium • DN 350…2000: painted steel (Amerlock 400) Measuring tube: •… -
Page 117
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data Promag H Transmitter housing: • Compact housing: powder coated die-cast aluminium or stainless-steel field housing 1.4301/316L • Wall-mounted housing: powder coated die-cast aluminium Sensor housing: 1.4301 Wall mounting (holder panel): 1.4301 Measuring tube: stainless steel 1.4301 or 1.4306/304L Flange: •… -
Page 118: Human Interface
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 Process connections Promag W: Flange connection: EN 1092-1 compliant (dimensions to DIN 2501; DN 65 PN 16 and DN 600 PN 16 exclusively to EN 1092-1), ANSI, AWWA, JIS Promag P: Flange connection: EN 1092-1 compliant (dimensions to DIN 2501; DN 65 PN 16 and…
-
Page 119: 10.1.11 Ordering Information
Category II/III for larger nominal diameters. CE mark The measuring system is in conformity with the statutory requirements of the EC Directives. Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark. Other standards and…
-
Page 120: Measuring-Tube Specifications
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 10.2 Measuring-tube specifications Promag W Pressure rating Inside diameter of Nominal diameter measuring tube EN (DIN) ANSI AWWA Hard rubber Polyurethane [mm] [inch] [bar] [lbs] − − 1″ PN 40 Cl 150 − −…
-
Page 121
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data Promag P Pressure rating Inside diameter of Nominal diameter measuring tube EN (DIN) ANSI with PFA with PTFE [mm] [inch] [bar] [lbs] [mm] [mm] − 1/2″ PN 40 Cl 150 1″ PN 40 Cl 150 −… -
Page 122: Dimensions Wall-Mounted Housing
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 10.3 Dimensions wall-mounted housing → Fig. 55: Dimensions wall-mounted housing (for panel installation and pipe mounting Page 44) Endress+Hauser…
-
Page 123: Dimensions Promag 50 W
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data 10.4 Dimensions Promag 50 W Promag W / DN ≤ 300 (compact version) ≤ Fig. 56: Dimensions Promag W / DN 300 (compact version) EN (DIN) / JIS ANSI [mm] [inch] [mm] [mm] [mm]…
-
Page 124
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 Promag W / DN ≤ 300 (remote version) ≤ Fig. 57: Dimensions Promag W / DN 300 (remote version) → Dimensions wall-mounted housing see Page 122 EN (DIN) / JIS ANSI [mm] [inch] [mm]… -
Page 125
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data Promag W / DN ≥ 350 (compact version) ≥ Fig. 58: Dimensions Promag W / DN 350 (compact version) EN (DIN) ANSI [mm] [inch] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] 14″ 738.5 456.5 282.0 16″… -
Page 126
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 Promag W / DN ≥ 350 (remote version) ≥ Fig. 59: Dimensions Promag W / DN 350 (remote version) → Dimensions wall-mounted housing see Page 122 EN (DIN) ANSI [mm] [inch] [mm] [mm] [mm]… -
Page 127: Dimensions Promag 50 P
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data 10.5 Dimensions Promag 50 P Promag P / DN ≤ 300 (compact version) ≤ Fig. 60: Dimensions Promag P / DN 300 (compact version) EN (DIN) / JIS ANSI [mm] [inch] [mm] [mm] [mm]…
-
Page 128
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 Promag P / DN ≤ 300 (remote version) ≤ Fig. 61: Dimensions Promag P / DN 300 (remote version) → Dimensions wall-mounted housing see Page 122 EN (DIN) / JIS ANSI [mm] [inch] [mm]… -
Page 129
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data Promag P / DN ≤ 300 / high-temperature version (compact version) ≤ Abb. 62: Dimensions of high-temperature version (Promag P, DN 300, compact) Dimensions A1, B1 = A, B of standard version plus 110 mm Promag P / DN ≤… -
Page 130
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 Promag P / DN ≥ 350 (compact version) ≥ Fig. 64: Dimensions Promag P / DN 350 (compact version) EN (DIN) ANSI [mm] [inch] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] 14″ 738.5 456.5 282.0 16″… -
Page 131
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data Promag P / DN ≥ 350 (remote version) ≥ Fig. 65: Dimensions Promag P / DN 350 (remote version) → Dimensions wall-mounted housing see Page 122 EN (DIN) ANSI [mm] [inch] [mm] [mm] [mm]… -
Page 132: Dimensions Of Ground Disks (Promag W, P)
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 10.6 Dimensions of ground disks (Promag W, P) Ø B Ø 6.5 Ø di Ø D Fig. 66: Dimensions of ground disks (Promag W, P / DN 15…300) EN (DIN) / JIS ANSI [mm]…
-
Page 133: Dimensions Promag 50 H
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data 10.7 Dimensions Promag 50 H Promag H / DN 2…25 (compact version) Fig. 67: Dimensions Promag H / DN 2…25 (compact version, aluminum field housing) Fig. 68: Dimensions Promag H / DN 2…25 (compact version, stainless-steel field housing)
-
Page 134
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 Promag H / DN 2…25 (remote version) Fig. 69: Dimensions Promag H / DN 2…25 (remote version) → Dimensions wall-mounted housing see Page 122 PN * [mm] [inch] [bar] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]… -
Page 135
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data Promag H / DN 40…100 (compact version) Fig. 71: Dimensions Promag H / DN 40…100 (compact version, aluminum field housing) Fig. 72: Dimensions Promag H / DN 40…100 (compact version, stainless-steel field housing) [mm]… -
Page 136
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 Promag H / DN 40…100 (remote version) Fig. 73: Dimensions Promag H / DN 40…100 (remote version) → Dimensions wall-mounted housing see Page 122 [mm] [inch] [bar] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] 1 1/2″… -
Page 137: Process Connections Promag H (Dn 2
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data 10.8 Process connections Promag H (DN 2…25) Front view of sensor Promag H / DN 2…25 (without process connections) DN 2…15 DN 25 ±0.1 ±0.1 ±0.1 ±0.1 Fig. 74: Dimensions front view of sensor DN 2…25…
-
Page 138
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 Process connections with O-ring seals (DN 2…25) Weld nipples Sensor Fits to H x B 1.4404 / 316L DN [mm] Piping [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] 5*H**-B*********** DIN EN ISO 1127 2…8 13.5 x 1.6 10.3… -
Page 139
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data Flange 20 K / JIS B2238 Sensor Fits to H x B 1.4404 / 316L DN [mm] Flange B2238 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] 5*H**-F*********** 2…8 ND 10 60 x 42 ND 15… -
Page 140
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 External pipe thread ISO 228 / Sensor Fits to H x B DIN 2999, 1.4404 / 316L Internal thread 5*H**-K*********** DN [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [mm] [mm] 2…8 R 3/8″ 3/8″ 10.1 60 x 42 R 1/2″… -
Page 141
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data Process connections with aseptic gasket seal (DN 2…25 ) Weld nipple for DIN Sensor Fits to H x B 1.4404 / 316L DN [mm] Piping DIN 11850 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] 5*H**-U*********** 2…8 14 x 2 23.3… -
Page 142
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 Tri-clamp L14 AM7 Sensor Fits to H x B 1.4404 / 316L DN [mm] Piping OD [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] 5*H**-1*********** 2…8 Tube 12.7 x 1.65 25.0 28.5 60 x 42 (ODT 1/2″) Tube 19.1 x 1.65 15.8… -
Page 143
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data Coupling: Sensor Fits to SMS 1145 H x B Threaded adapter SMS 1145 DN [mm] Piping OD Diameter [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] 1.4404 / 316L [mm] 5*H**-5*********** 25 (1″ ANSI) 1″ 22.5 Rd 40 x 1/6″… -
Page 144
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 Process connections orderable only as accessories (with aseptic gasket seal) Tri-Clamp L14 AM7 Sensor Fits to H x B 1.4404 / 316L DN [mm] Piping OD [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] DKH**-HF*** Tube 25.4 x 1.5 22.1… -
Page 145
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data 10.9 Process connections Promag H (DN 40…100) Front view Promag H / DN 40…100 (without process connection) Fig. 75: Dimensions front view of sensor DN 40…100 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]… -
Page 146
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 Process connections with gasket seal (DN 40…100) Weld nipples for DIN Sensor Fits to 1.4404 / 316L DN [mm] Piping DIN 11850 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] 5*H**-U*********** 42 x 2 38.0 71.0 54 x 2 50.0… -
Page 147
PROline Promag 50 10 Technical data Tri-Clamp L14 AM7 Sensor Fits to 1.4404 / 316L DN [mm] DN [inch] Piping OD [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] 5*H**-1*********** 1 1/2″ 38.1 x 1.65 34.8 50.4 68.6 71.0 2″ 50.8 x 1.65 47.5… -
Page 148
10 Technical data PROline Promag 50 Coupling: Sensor Fits to SMS 1145 Threaded adapter SMS 1145 DN [mm] Piping OD Diameter [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] 1.4404 / 316L [mm] 5*H**-5*********** 38.1 x 1.65 38.0 35.5 Rd 60 x 1/6″… -
Page 149: Index
PROline Promag 50 Index Index ground rings (Promag H) ….144 process connections, Promag H (DN 2…25) . . . 137 Accessories ……. 85 process connections, Promag H (DN 40…100) .
-
Page 150
Index PROline Promag 50 printed circuit boards ….. 97 vibrations ……18 Installing sensor adapters . -
Page 151
PROline Promag 50 Index HART commands ……67 temperature ranges (Promag H) … . 112 HART handheld communicator . -
Page 152
Index PROline Promag 50 Endress+Hauser… -
Page 153
‘HFODUDWLRQ RI FRQWDPLQDWLRQ Dear customer, Because of legal determinations and for the safety of our employees and operating equipment we need this “Declaration of contamination” with your signature before your order can be handled. Please put the completely filled in declaration to the instrument and to the shipping documents in any case. Add also safety sheets and/or specific handling instructions if necessary. -
Page 154
❑ Endress+Hauser Ges.m.b.H. Poland – Wroclaw Japan – Tokyo Costa Rica – San Jose ❑ Endress+Hauser Polska Sp. z o.o. ❑ Sakura Endress Co. Ltd. Tel. (01) 88 05 60, Fax (01) 88 05 63 35 Euro-Tec S.A. Tel. (0422) 54 06 11, Fax (0422) 55 02 75 Tel.
BA00046D/06/EN/15.14
71249447
Valid as of version
V 2.04.XX (device software)
Products Solutions
Operating Instructions
Proline Promag 50
HART
Electromagnetic flowmeter
6
Services
Products Solutions Services
Promag 50
Table of contents
1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1 Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 Installation, commissioning and operation . . . . . . 4
1.3 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.5 Notes on safety conventions and icons . . . . . . . . . 5
2 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.1 Device designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.2 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.3 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.1 Incoming acceptance, transport and storage . . . 10
3.2 Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.3 Installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.4 Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.1 Connecting the remote version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.2 Connecting the measuring unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.3 Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.4 Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.5 Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.1 Display and operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.2 Brief operating instructions on the function matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.3 Displaying error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5.4 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6 Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.1 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.2 Switching on the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.3 Quick Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
6.5 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.6 Data storage device (HistoROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.2 Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
8 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
8.1 Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
8.2 Measuring
8.3 Communication-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . 79
8.4 Service-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
9 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
9.1 Troubleshooting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
9.2 System error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
9.3 Process error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
9.4 Process errors without messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
9.5 Response of outputs to errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
9.6 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
9.7 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
9.8 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
9.9 Software history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
10 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
10.1 Technical data at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Endress+Hauser 3
Safety instructions Promag 50
1 Safety instructions
1.1
Designated use
The measuring device described in this Operating Manual is to be used only for measuring the flow rate of conductive fluids in closed pipes.
A minimum conductivity of 20 μS/cm is required for measuring demineralized water. Most liquids can be measured as of a minimum conductivity of 5 μS/cm.
Examples:
• Acids, alkalis
• Drinking water, wastewater, sewage sludge
• Milk, beer, wine, mineral water, etc.
Resulting from incorrect use or from use other than that designated the operational safety of the measuring devices can be suspended. The manufacturer accepts no liability for damages being produced from this.
1.2
Installation, commissioning and operation
Please note the following:
• Installation, connection to the electricity supply, commissioning and maintenance of the device must be carried out by trained, qualified specialists authorized to perform such work by the facility’s owner-operator. The specialist must have read and understood this
Operating Manual and must follow the instructions it contains.
• The device must be operated by persons authorized and trained by the facility’s owneroperator. Strict compliance with the instructions in the Operating Manual is mandatory.
• With regard to special fluids, including fluids used for cleaning, Endress+Hauser will be happy to assist in clarifying the corrosion-resistant properties of wetted materials.
However, minor changes in temperature, concentration or in the degree of contamination in the process may result in variations in corrosion resistance. For this reason,
Endress+Hauser does not accept any responsibility with regard to the corrosion resistance of wetted materials in a specific application.
The user is responsible for the choice of suitable wetted materials in the process.
• If welding work is performed on the piping system, do not ground the welding appliance through the Promag flowmeter.
• The installer must ensure that the measuring system is correctly wired in accordance with the wiring diagrams. The transmitter must be grounded apart from when special protective measures are taken (e.g. galvanically isolated SELV or PELV power supply)
• Invariably, local regulations governing the opening and repair of electrical devices apply.
1.3
Operational safety
Please note the following:
• Measuring systems for use in hazardous environments are accompanied by separate Ex documentation, which is an integral part of this Operating Manual. Strict compliance with the installation instructions and ratings as stated in this supplementary documentation is mandatory. The symbol on the front of this Ex documentation indicates the approval and the certification body (e.g.
0
Europe,
2
USA,
1
Canada).
• The measuring device complies with the general safety requirements in accordance with
EN 61010-1, the EMC requirements of IEC/EN 61326 and NAMUR Recommendations
NE 21 and NE 43.
• Depending on the application, the seals of the process connections of the Promag H sensor require periodic replacement.
4 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Safety instructions
• When hot fluid passes through the measuring tube, the surface temperature of the housing increases. In the case of the sensor, in particular, users should expect temperatures that can be close to the fluid temperature. If the temperature of the fluid is high, implement sufficient measures to prevent burning or scalding.
• The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your
Endress+Hauser distributor will supply you with current information and updates to these
Operating Instructions.
1.4
Return
• Do not return a measuring device if you are not absolutely certain that all traces of hazardous substances have been removed, e.g. substances which have penetrated crevices or diffused through plastic.
• Costs incurred for waste disposal and injury (burns, etc.) due to inadequate cleaning will be charged to the owner-operator.
1.5
Notes on safety conventions and icons
The devices are designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, have been tested, and left the factory in a condition in which they are safe to operate. The devices comply with the applicable standards and regulations in accordance with EN 61010-1 «Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use».
The devices can, however, be a source of danger if used incorrectly or for anything other than the designated use. Consequently, always pay particular attention to the safety instructions indicated in this Operating Manual by the following icons:
#
Warning!
«Warning» indicates an action or procedure which, if not performed correctly, can result in injury or a safety hazard. Comply strictly with the instructions and proceed with care.
«
Caution!
«Caution» indicates an action or procedure which, if not performed correctly, can result in incorrect operation or destruction of the device. Comply strictly with the instructions.
!
Note!
«Note» indicates an action or procedure which, if not performed correctly, can have an indirect effect on operation or trigger an unexpected response on the part of the device.
Endress+Hauser 5
Identification Promag 50
2 Identification
2.1
Device designation
The flow measuring system consists of the following components:
• Promag 50 transmitter
• Promag D/E/H/L/P/W sensor
In the compact version, the transmitter and sensor form a single mechanical unit; in the
remote version they are installed separately.
2.1.1
Nameplate of the transmitter
8 9
7
8
5
6
9
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Promag 50
Order Code:
50PXX-XXXXXXXXXXXX
Ser.No.:
12345678901
TAG No.:
ABCDEFGHJKLMNPQRST
20-55VAC/16-62VDC
15VA/W 50-60Hz
EPD / MSÜ
ECC
I-OUT (HART), f-OUT
STATUS-IN i
IP67 / NEMA/Type 4X
-20°C (-4°F) <Tamb<+60°C (+140°F)
N12895
A0005412
Ordering code/serial number: See the specifications on the order confirmation for the meanings of the individual letters and digits.
Power supply, frequency, power consumption
Additional information:
EPD/MSÜ: with Empty Pipe Detection
ECC: with electrode cleaning
Outputs available:
I-OUT (HART): with current output (HART) f-OUT (HART): with frequency output
STATUS-IN: with status input (power supply)
Reserved for information on special products
Observe device documentation
Reserved for additional information on device version (approvals, certificates)
Permitted ambient temperature range
Degree of protection
6 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Identification
2.1.2
Nameplate of the sensor
7
8
9
5
6
3
4
1
2
PROMAG P
Order Code:
Ser.No.:
TAG No.:
50PXX-XXXXXXXXXXXX
12345678901 RY
ABCDEFGHJKLMNPQRST
K-factor:
1.0000/0000 pnom =PS= 40bar
TM:
–10 °C °F
Materials:
PFA
Electrodes:
1.4435/316L
2007
0.2% CAL
EPD/MSÜ, R/B
10
11
-20°C (-4°F)<Tamb<+60°C (+140°F) i
N12895
IP67
NEMA/Type4X
12
13
A0004374
1
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
10
11
12
13
Ordering code/serial number: See the specifications on the order confirmation for the meanings of the individual letters and digits.
Calibration factor with zero point
Nominal diameter / Pressure rating
Fluid temperature range
Materials: lining/measuring electrodes
Reserved for information on special products
Permitted ambient temperature range
Observe device documentation
Reserved for additional information on device version (approvals, certificates)
Calibration tolerance
Additional information (examples):
– EPD/MSÜ: with Empty Pipe Detection electrode
– R/B: with reference electrode
Degree of protection
Flow direction
Endress+Hauser 7
Identification
8
Promag 50
2.1.3
Nameplate, connections
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
See operating manual
Betriebsanleitung beachten
Observer manuel d’instruction
Ser.No.:
12345678912
Supply /
Versorgung /
Tension d’alimentation
Active: 0/4…20mA, RL max. = 700 Ohm
Passive: 4…20mA, max. 30VDC
(HART: RL.min. = 250 OHM) fmax = 1kHz
Active: 24VDC/25mA (max. 250mA/20ms)
Passive: 30VDC, 250mA
Passive: 30VDC, 250mA
I-OUT (HART) f-OUT
A:
P:
NO:
NC: active passive normally open contact normally closed contact
1 2
L1/L+
N/L-
PE
STATUS-OUT
X
P
A
3…30VDC, Ri = 5kOhm
Ex-works / ab-Werk / réglages usine
Device SW:
Communication:
Drivers:
XX.XX.XX (WEA)
XXXXXXXXXX
ID xxxx (HEX)
Date: DD.MMM.YYYY
STATUS-IN
Update 1
319475-00XX
X
Update 2
10
2
3
A0000963
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
10
Serial number
Possible configuration of current output
Possible configuration of relay contacts
Terminal assignment, cable for power supply: 85 to 260 V AC, 20 to 55 V AC, 16 to 62 V DC
Terminal No. 1: L1 for AC, L+ for DC
Terminal No. 2: N for AC, L– for DC
Signals present at inputs and outputs, possible configuration and terminal assignment (20 to 27), see also «Electrical values of inputs/outputs»
Version of device software currently installed
Installed communication type, e.g.: HART, PROFIBUS PA, etc.
Information on current communication software (Device Revision and Device Description), e.g.:
Dev. 01 / DD 01 for HART
Date of installation
Current updates to data specified in points 6 to 9
2.2
Certificates and approvals
The devices are designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements in accordance with sound engineering practice. They have been tested and left the factory in a condition in which they are safe to operate.
The devices comply with the applicable standards and regulations in accordance with EN
61010-1 «Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use» and with the EMC requirements of IEC/EN 61326/A1.
The measuring system described in this Operating Manual is therefore in conformity with the statutory requirements of the EC Directives. Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.
The measuring system meets the EMC requirements of the «Australian Communications and
Media Authority (ACMA)».
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Identification
2.3
Registered trademarks
KALREZ® and VITON
®
Registered trademarks of E.I. Du Pont de Nemours & Co., Wilmington, USA
TRI-CLAMP®
Registered trademark of Ladish & Co., Inc., Kenosha, USA
HART
®
Registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation, Austin, USA
HistoROM™, S-DAT®, Field Xpert™, FieldCare®, Fieldcheck®, Applicator®
Registered or registration-pending trademarks of Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG, Reinach, CH
Endress+Hauser 9
Installation Promag 50
3 Installation
3.1
Incoming acceptance, transport and storage
3.1.1
Incoming acceptance
On receipt of the goods, check the following:
• Check the packaging and the contents for damage.
• Check the shipment, make sure nothing is missing and that the scope of supply matches your order.
3.1.2
Transport
The following instructions apply to unpacking and to transporting the device to its final location:
• Transport the devices in the containers in which they are delivered.
• Do not remove the protective plates or caps on the process connections until you are ready to install the device. This is particularly important in the case of sensors with PTFE linings.
Special notes on flanged devices
«
Caution!
• The wooden covers mounted on the flanges from the factory protect the linings on the flanges during storage and transportation. In case of Promag L they are additionally used to hold the lap joint flanges in place. Do not remove these covers until immediately before the device in the pipe.
• Do not lift flanged devices by the transmitter housing, or the connection housing in the case of the remote version.
Transporting flanged devices DN
300 (12″)
Use webbing slings slung round the two process connections. Do not use chains, as they could damage the housing.
#
Warning!
Risk of injury if the measuring device slips. The center of gravity of the assembled measuring device might be higher than the points around which the slings are slung.
At all times, therefore, make sure that the device does not unexpectedly turn around its axis or slip.
10
Fig. 4: Transporting sensors with DN
300 (12″)
a0004294
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Installation
Transporting flangeddevices DN > 300 (12″)
«
Use only the metal eyes on the flanges for transporting the device, lifting it and positioning the sensor in the piping.
Caution!
Do not attempt to lift the sensor with the tines of a fork-lift truck beneath the metal casing.
This would buckle the casing and damage the internal magnetic coils.
a0004295
Fig. 5: Transporting sensors with DN > 300 (12″)
3.1.3
Storage
Please note the following:
• Pack the measuring device in such a way as to protect it reliably against impact for storage
(and transportation). The original packaging provides optimum protection.
• The storage temperature corresponds to the operating temperature range of the
measuring transmitter and the appropriate measuring sensors → 101.
• Do not remove the protective plates or caps on the process connections until you are ready to install the device. This is particularly important in the case of sensors with PTFE linings.
• The measuring device must be protected against direct sunlight during storage in order to avoid unacceptably high surface temperatures.
• Choose a storage location where moisture does not collect in the measuring device. This will help prevent fungus and bacteria infestation which can damage the liner.
Endress+Hauser 11
Installation Promag 50
3.2
Installation conditions
3.2.1
Dimensions
The dimensions and installation lengths of the sensor and transmitter can be found in the
«Technical Information» for the device in question. This document can be downloaded as a
PDF file from www.endress.com. A list of the «Technical Information» documents available is
provided in the «Documentation» section on → 124.
3.2.2
Mounting location
Entrained air or gas bubble formation in the measuring tube can result in an increase in measuring errors.
Avoid the following locations:
• Highest point of a pipeline. Risk of air accumulating!
• Directly upstream from a free pipe outlet in a vertical pipeline.
h
³
2 x DN
A0008154
Installation of pumps
Do not install the sensor on the intake side of a pump. This precaution is to avoid low pressure and the consequent risk of damage to the lining of the measuring tube. Information
on the lining’s resistance to partial vacuum can be found on → 106.
It might be necessary to install pulse dampers in systems incorporating reciprocating, diaphragm or peristaltic pumps. Information on the measuring system’s resistance to
vibration and shock can be found on → 102.
A0003203
Fig. 7: Installation of pumps
12 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Installation
Partially filled pipes
Partially filled pipes with gradients necessitate a drain-type configuration.
The Empty Pipe Detection function (EPD → 75) offers additional protection by detecting
empty or partially filled pipes.
«
Caution!
Risk of solids accumulating. Do not install the sensor at the lowest point in the drain. It is advisable to install a cleaning valve.
³
5 x DN
³
2 x DN
A0008155
Fig. 8: Installation in a partially filled pipe
Down pipes
Install a siphon or a vent valve downstream of the sensor in down pipes whose length h 5 m (16.4 ft). This precaution is to avoid low pressure and the consequent risk of damage to the lining of the measuring tube.
This measure also prevents the system losing prime, which could cause air pockets.
Information on the lining’s resistance to partial vacuum can be found on → 106.
1
2
A0008157
Fig. 9:
1
2 h
Measures for installation in a down pipe
Vent valve
Pipe siphon
Length of down pipe
Endress+Hauser 13
Installation Promag 50
3.2.3
Orientation
An optimum orientation position helps avoid gas and air accumulations and deposits in the measuring tube. However, Promag offers the additional Empty Pipe Detection (EPD) function to ensure the detection of partially filled measuring tubes, e.g. in the case of degassing fluids or varying process pressure:
• Electrode Cleaning Circuit (ECC) for applications with accretive fluids, e.g. electrically conductive deposits ( «Description of Device Functions» manual).
• Empty Pipe Detection (EPD) ensures the detection of partially filled measuring tubes, e.g.
in the case of degassing fluids (→ 75)
• Exchangeable Measuring Electrodes for abrasive fluids (→ 94)
Vertical orientation
This is the ideal orientation for self-emptying piping systems and for use in conjunction with
Empty Pipe Detection.
14
A0008158
Horizontal orientation
The measuring electrode plane should be horizontal. This prevents brief insulation of the two measuring electrodes by entrained air bubbles.
«
Caution!
Empty Pipe Detection functions correctly only when the measuring device is installed
horizontally and the transmitter housing is facing upward (→ 10). Otherwise there is no
guarantee that Empty Pipe Detection will respond if the measuring tube is only partially filled or empty.
A
1
2 2
A
3
A0003207
1
2
3
EPD electrode for the detection of empty pipes (not with Promag D and Promag H (DN 2 to 15 / 1/12 to ½»))
Measuring electrodes for signal detection
Reference electrode for the potential equalization (not with Promag D and H)
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Installation
Inlet and outlet run
If possible, install the sensor upstream from fittings such as valves, T-pieces, elbows, etc. The following inlet and outlet runs must be observed in order to meet accuracy specifications:
• Inlet run: 5 × DN
• Outlet run: 2 × DN
Endress+Hauser
Fig. 12: Inlet and outlet runs
3.2.4
Vibrations
«
Secure the piping and the sensor if vibration is severe.
Caution!
If vibrations are too severe, we recommend the sensor and transmitter be mounted
separately. Information on resistance to vibration and shock can be found on → 102.
A0003210
L
A0003208
Fig. 13: Measures to prevent vibration of the device (L > 10 m (32.8 ft))
15
Installation Promag 50
3.2.5
Foundations, supports
If the nominal diameter is DN 350 (14″), mount the sensor on a foundation of adequate load-bearing strength.
«
Caution!
Risk of damage.
Do not support the weight of the sensor on the metal casing: the casing would buckle and damage the internal magnetic coils.
16
A0003209
Fig. 14: Correct support for large nominal diameters (DN
350 / 14″)
3.2.6
Adapters
Suitable adapters to DIN EN 545 (double-flange reducers) can be used to install the sensor in larger-diameter pipes.
The resultant increase in the rate of flow improves measuring accuracy with very slowmoving fluids. The nomogram shown here can be used to calculate the pressure loss caused by reducers and expanders.
!
Note!
The nomogram only applies to liquids of viscosity similar to water.
1. Calculate the ratio of the diameters d/D.
2. From the nomogram read off the pressure loss as a function of flow velocity
(downstream from the reduction) and the d/D ratio.
max. 8° d D
[mbar] 100
10
1
8 m/s
7 m/s
6 m/s
5 m/s
4 m/s
3 m/s
2 m/s
1 m/s
Fig. 15: Pressure loss due to adapters
d / D 0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
A0011907
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Installation
3.2.7
Nominal diameter and flow rate
The diameter of the pipe and the flow rate determine the nominal diameter of the sensor.
The optimum velocity of flow is between 2 and 3 m/s (6.5 to 9.8 ft/s).
The velocity of flow (v), moreover, has to be matched to the physical properties of the fluid:
• v < 2 m/s (v < 6.5 ft/s): for abrasive fluids
• v > 2 m/s (v > 6.5 ft/s): for fluids producing buildup
!
Note!
Flow velocity can be increased, if necessary, by reducing the nominal diameter of the sensor
(→ 16).
Recommended flow (SI units)
500
600
700
750
800
900
1000
1050
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
350
375
400
450
150
200
250
300
80
100
125
[mm]
32
40
50
65
Nominal diameter
[mm]
2
4
8
15
25
Promag D Promag E/P Promag H Promag L Promag W
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
9 to 300
–
25 to 700
35 to 1100
60 to 2000
90 to 3000
145 to 4700
–
Min./max. full scale value (v 0.3 or 10 m/s) in [dm³/min]
– 0.06 to 1.8
–
–
–
0.25 to 7
1 to 30
–
–
4 to 100
9 to 300
15 to 500
25 to 700
4 to 100
9 to 300
–
25 to 700
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
9 to 300
15 to 500
25 to 700
35 to 1100 35 to 1100
60 to 2000
90 to 3000
145 to 4700
35 to 1100
60 to 2000
90 to 3000
145 to 4700
35 to 1100
60 to 2000
90 to 3000
145 to 4700
60 to 2000
90 to 3000
145 to 4700
220 to 7500 220 to 7500 – 220 to 7500
Min./max. full scale value (v 0.3 or 10 m/s) in [m³/h]
20 to 600
35 to 1100
–
–
20 to 600
35 to 1100
55 to 1700
80 to 2400
110 to 3300
–
140 to 4200
180 to 5400
220 to 6600
310 to 9600
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
55 to 1700
80 to 2400
110 to 3300
140 to 4200
140 to 4200
180 to 5400
220 to 6600
310 to 9600
420 to 13500
480 to 15200
550 to 18000
690 to 22500
850 to 28000
950 to 40000
1250 to 40000
–
–
–
–
20 to 600
35 to 1100
55 to 1700
80 to 2400
110 to 3300
140 to 4200
140 to 4200
180 to 5400
220 to 6600
310 to 9600
420 to 13500
480 to 15200
550 to 18000
690 to 22500
850 to 28000
950 to 40000
1250 to 40000
1700 to 55000
2200 to 70000
2800 to 90000
3400 to 110000
Endress+Hauser 17
Installation Promag 50
Recommended flow (US units)
28″
30″
32″
36″
40″
42″
48″
[inch]
54″
60″
66″
72″
78″
16″
18″
20″
24″
10″
12″
14″
15″
Nominal diameter
1″
1
/
«
1
/
«
2″
2
/
«
3″
[inch]
1
/
«
/
«
/
«
/
«
6″
8″
4″
5″
Promag D Promag E/P Promag H Promag L Promag W
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
2.5 to 80
–
7 to 190
10 to 300
16 to 500
24 to 800
40 to 1250
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Min./max. full scale value (v 0.3 or 10 m/s) in [gal/min]
–
–
–
1.0 to 27
2.5 to 80
4 to 130
7 to 190
10 to 300
16 to 500
24 to 800
40 to 1250
60 to 1950
90 to 2650
155 to 4850
250 to 7500
350 to 10600
500 to 15000
–
600 to 19000
800 to 24000
1000 to 30000
1400 to 44000
–
–
–
–
0.015 to 0.5
0.07 to 2
0.25 to 8
1.0 to 27
2.5 to 80
–
7 to 190
10 to 300
16 to 500
24 to 800
40 to 1250
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7 to 190
10 to 300
16 to 500
24 to 800
40 to 1250
60 to 1950
90 to 2650
155 to 4850
250 to 7500
350 to 10600
500 to 15000
600 to 19000
600 to 19000
800 to 24000
1000 to 30000
1400 to 44000
1900 to 60000
2150 to 67000
2450 to 80000
–
–
–
–
2.5 to 80
4 to 130
7 to 190
10 to 300
16 to 500
24 to 800
40 to 1250
60 to 1950
90 to 2650
155 to 4850
250 to 7500
350 to 10600
500 to 15000
600 to 19000
600 to 19000
800 to 24000
1000 to 30000
1400 to 44000
1900 to 60000
2150 to 67000
2450 to 80000
3100 to 100000 3100 to 100000
–
–
–
–
3800 to 125000
4200 to 135000
3800 to 125000
4200 to 135000
– – 5500 to 175000 5500 to 175000
Min./max. full scale value (v 0.3 or 10 m/s) in [Mgal/d]
–
–
–
–
–
–
9 to 300
12 to 380
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
14 to 500
16 to 570
18 to 650
18 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Installation
3.2.8
Length of connecting cable
In order to ensure measuring accuracy, comply with the following instructions when installing the remote version:
• Fix cable run or lay in armored conduit. Cable movements can falsify the measuring signal especially in the case of low fluid conductivities.
• Route the cable well clear of electrical machines and switching elements.
• Ensure potential equalization between sensor and transmitter, if necessary.
• The permitted connecting cable length L max
is determined by the fluid conductivity (→
16). A minimum conductivity of 20 μS/cm is required for measuring demineralized water.
Most liquids can be measured as of a minimum conductivity of 5 μS/cm.
• The maximum connecting cable length is 10 m (32.8 ft) when empty pipe detection
(EPD → 75) is switched on.
[µS/cm]
200
100
L max
Fig. 16: Permissible cable length for the remote version
Area shaded gray = permitted range
Lmax = connecting cable length in [m]
Fluid conductivity in [μS/cm]
5
0
10
200
100
400
200
600
[ft]
L max
A0010734
Endress+Hauser 19
Installation Promag 50
3.3
Installation instructions
3.3.1
Installing the Promag D sensor
The sensor is installed between the pipe flanges with a mounting kit. The device is centered
using recesses on the sensor (→ 21).
!
Note!
A mounting kit consisting of mounting bolts, seals, nuts and washers can be ordered
separately (→ 78). Centering sleeves are provided with the device if they are required for
the installation.
«
Caution!
When installing the transmitter in the pipe, observe the necessary torques (→ 22).
5
1
2
3
4
Fig. 17:
3
4
1
2
5
Mounting the sensor
Nut
Washer
Mounting bolt
Centering sleeve
Seal
a0010776
Seals
When installing the sensor, make sure that the seals used do not project into the pipe crosssection.
«
Caution!
Risk of short circuit! Do not use electrically conductive sealing compounds such as graphite!
An electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube and shortcircuit the measuring signal.
!
Note!
Use seals with a hardness rating of 70° Shore.
20 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Endress+Hauser
Installation
Arrangement of the mounting bolts and centering sleeves
The device is centered using recesses on the sensor. The arrangement of the mounting bolts and the use of the centering sleeves supplied depend on the nominal diameter, the flange standard und the pitch circle diameter.
EN (DIN)
Process connection
ASME JIS
DN 25 to 40
(1 to 1 ½»)
1 1 1 1
1 1
DN 50 (2″)
1
1
A0010896
1
A0010824
1
A0010896
DN 65 (–)
DN 80 (3″)
1
DN 100 (4″)
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
3
3
2
3
1
A0010897
3
2
3
2
3
3
A0012170
A0010825
–––––––––––––––––
1
1
1
A0010898
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A0012168
1 = Mounting bolts with centering sleeves
2 = EN (DIN) flanges: 4-hole with centering sleeves
3 = EN (DIN) flanges: 8-hole without centering sleeves
1
1
1
A0010827
1
1
A0012168
A0010825
A0012171
A0010826
A0012169
21
Installation Promag 50
Screw tightening torques (Promag D)
Please note the following:
• The tightening torques listed below are for lubricated threads only.
• Always tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence.
• Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals.
• The tightening torques listed below apply only to pipes not subjected to tensile stress.
The tightening torques apply to situations where an EPDM soft material flat seal (e.g. 70
Shore) is used.
Tightening torques, mounting bolts and centering sleeves for EN (DIN) PN 16
Nominal diameter
[mm]
25
40
Mounting bolts
[mm]
4 × M12 × 145
4 × M16 × 170
Centering sleeve length
[mm]
54
68
Tightening torque [Nm] with a process flange with a smooth seal face
19
33
50
65
65
80
4 × M16 × 185
4 × M16 × 200
8 × M16 × 200
8 × M16 × 225
82
92
–
116
41
44
29
36
100 8 × M16 × 260 147 40
EN (DIN) flanges: 4-hole with centering sleeves
EN (DIN) flanges: 8-hole without centering sleeves
A centering sleeve is not required. The device is centered directly via the sensor housing.
raised face
19
33
41
44
29
36
40
Tightening torques, mounting bolts and centering sleeves for JIS 10K
Nominal diameter
[mm]
25
40
50
65
80
100
Mounting bolts
[mm]
4 × M16 × 170
4 × M16 × 170
4 × M16 × 185
4 × M16 × 200
8 × M16 × 225
8 × M16 × 260
Centering sleeve length
[mm]
54
68
– *
– *
– *
– *
Tightening torque [Nm] with a process flange with a smooth seal face raised face
24
32
38
42
24
25
30
42
36
39
* A centering sleeve is not required. The device is centered directly via the sensor housing.
28
37
Tightening torques, mounting bolts and centering sleeves for ASME Class 150
Nominal diameter
[inch]
1″
1 ½»
2″
3″
4″
Mounting bolts
[inch]
4 × UNC 1/2″ × 5.70″
4 × UNC 1/2″ × 6.50″
4 × UNC 5/8″ × 7.50″
4 × UNC 5/8″ × 9.25″
8 × UNC 5/8″ × 10,4″
Centering sleeve length
[inch]
– *
– *
– *
– *
5,79
Tightening torque [lbf · ft] with a process flange with a smooth seal face
14
21 raised face
7
14
30
31
28
* A centering sleeve is not required. The device is centered directly via the sensor housing.
27
31
28
22 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Installation
3.3.2
Installing the Promag E sensor
«
Caution!
• The protective covers mounted on the two sensor flanges guard the PTFE, which is turned over the flanges. Consequently, do not remove these covers until immediately before the sensor is installed in the pipe.
• The covers must remain in place while the device is in storage.
• Make sure that the lining is not damaged or removed from the flanges.
!
Note!
Bolts, nuts, seals, etc. are not included in the scope of supply and must be supplied by the customer.
The sensor is designed for installation between the two piping flanges.
• Observe in any case the necessary screw tightening torques on → 24
• If grounding disks are used, follow the mounting instructions which will be enclosed with the shipment
Endress+Hauser a0004296
Fig. 18: Installing the Promag E sensor
Seals
Comply with the following instructions when installing seals:
• PFA or PTFE lining No seals are required!
• For DIN flanges, use only seals according to EN 1514-1.
• Make sure that the seals do not protrude into the piping cross-section.
«
Caution!
Risk of short circuit! Do not use electrically conductive sealing compounds such as graphite!
An electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube and shortcircuit the measuring signal.
Ground cable
• If necessary, special ground cables for potential equalization can be ordered as an
accessory (→ 78).
• Information on potential equalization and detailed mounting instructions for the use of
ground cables can be found on → 55
23
Installation Promag 50
Tightening torques for threaded fasteners (Promag E)
Please note the following:
• The tightening torques listed below are for lubricated threads only.
• Always tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence.
• Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals.
• The tightening torques listed below apply only to pipes not subjected to tensile stress.
Tightening torques for:
• EN (DIN) → 24
• ASME → 25
• JIS → 25
Promag E tightening torques for EN (DIN)
Nominal diameter
[mm]
15
25
32
40
50
65 *
80
100
125
250
300
300
350
150
200
200
250
EN (DIN)
Pressure rating [bar]
PN 40
PN 40
PN 40
PN 40
PN 40
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 10
PN 16
PN 10
PN 16
PN 10
PN 16
PN 6
400
450
450
450
350
350
400
400
PN 10
PN 16
PN 6
PN 10
PN 16
PN 6
PN 10
PN 16
500
500
500
600
PN 6
PN 10
PN 16
PN 6
600
600 *
PN 10
PN 16
* Designed acc. to EN 1092-1 (not to DIN 2501)
16 × M 20
16 × M 24
16 × M 20
16 × M 24
16 × M 27
16 × M 20
20 × M 24
20 × M 27
20 × M 20
20 × M 24
20 × M 30
20 × M 24
20 × M 27
20 × M 33
Threaded fasteners
4 × M 12
4 × M 12
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 20
8 × M 20
12 × M 20
12 × M 20
12 × M 24
12 × M 20
12 × M 24
12 × M 20
176
265
448
242
345
658
330
202
235
300
188
254
166
260
Max. tightening torque
[Nm]
11
26
41
52
65
43
53
57
75
131
125
179
200
99
141
94
110
24 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Installation
Promag E tightening torques for ASME
Nominal diameter
300
350
400
450
500
600
[mm]
15
25
40
50
80
100
150
200
250
12″
14″
16″
18″
20″
24″
[inch]
½»
1″
1 ½»
2″
3″
4″
6″
8″
10″
ASME
Pressure rating
[lbs]
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Promag E tightening torques for JIS
Nominal diameter
[mm]
15
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
JIS
Pressure rating
20K
20K
20K
20K
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
Threaded fasteners
4 × M 12
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 20
8 × M 20
12 × M 20
12 × M 22
16 × M 22
Threaded fasteners
4 × ½»
4 × ½»
4 × ½»
4 × 5/8″
4 × 5/8″
8 × 5/8″
8 × ¾»
8 × ¾»
12 × 7/8″
12 × 7/8″
12 × 1″
16 × 1″
16 × 1 1/8″
20 × 1 1/8″
20 × 1 ¼»
178
260
246
371
56
106
143
135
341
477
Max. tightening torque
PTFE
[Nm]
6
[lbf · ft]
4
11
24
47
79
8
18
35
58
131
192
181
274
41
78
105
100
252
352
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
PTFE
16
32
38
41
54
74
38
47
80
99
82
133
99
Endress+Hauser 25
Installation Promag 50
3.3.3
Installing the Promag H sensor
The sensor is supplied to order, with or without pre-installed process connections. Preinstalled process connections are secured to the sensor with 4 or 6 hex-head threaded fasteners.
«
Caution!
The sensor might require support or additional attachments, depending on the application and the length of the piping run. When plastic process connections are used, the sensor must be additionally supported mechanically. A wall-mounting kit can be ordered separately from
Endress+Hauser as an accessory (→ 78).
A
C
B
a0004301
Abb. 19: Promag H process connections (DN 2 to 25 / 1/12 to 1″, DN 40 to 100 / 1½ to 4″)
A = DN 2 to 25 / 1/12 to 1″: process connections with O-ring
– welding flanges (DIN EN ISO 1127, ODT / SMS),
– flange (EN (DIN), ASME, JIS ), flange PVDF (EN (DIN), ASME, JIS )
– external and internal thread, hose connection, PVC adhesive fitting
B = DN 2 to 25 / 1/12 to 1″: process connections with aseptic gasket vseal
– weld nipples (DIN 11850, ODT/SMS)
– Clamp (ISO 2852, DIN 32676, L14 AM7)
– coupling (DIN 11851, DIN 11864-1, SMS 1145)
– flange DIN 11864-2
C = DN 40 to 100 / 1½ to 4″: process connections with aseptic gasket seal
– weld nipples (DIN 11850, ODT/SMS)
– Clamp (ISO 2852, DIN 32676, L14 AM7)
– coupling (DIN 11851, DIN 11864-1, ISO 2853, SMS 1145)
– flange DIN 11864-2
Seals
When installing the process connections, make sure that the seals are clean and correctly centered.
«
Caution!
• With metal process connections, you must fully tighten the screws. The process connection forms a metallic connection with the sensor, which ensures a defined compression of the seal.
• With plastic process connections, note the max. torques for lubricated threads (7 Nm /
5.2 lbf ft). With plastic flanges, always use seals between connection and counter flange.
• The seals must be replaced periodically, depending on the application, particularly in the case of gasket seals (aseptic version)!
The period between changes depends on the frequency of cleaning cycles, the cleaning temperature and the fluid temperature. Replacement seals can be ordered as accessories
→ 78.
26 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Installation
Usage and assembly of ground rings (DN 2 to 25 / 1/12 to 1″)
In case the process connections are made of plastic (e.g. flanges or adhesive fittings), the potential between the sensor and the fluid must be equalized using additional ground rings.
If the ground rings are not installed this can affect the accuracy of the measurements or cause the destruction of the sensor through the electrochemical erosion of the electrodes.
«
Caution!
• Depending on the option ordered, plastic disks may be installed at the process connections instead of ground rings. These plastic disks serve only as spacers and have no potential equalization function. In addition, they provide a sealing function at the interface between the sensor and process connection. For this reason, with process connections without ground rings, these plastic disks/seals must not be removed, or must always be installed.
• Ground rings can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser as accessories (→ 78).
When placing the order, make certain that the ground ring is compatible with the material used for the electrodes. Otherwise, there is a risk that the electrodes may be destroyed by
electrochemical corrosion! Information about the materials can be found on → 117.
• Ground rings, including the seals, are mounted within the process connections.
Therefore, the fitting length is not affected.
1. Loosen the four or six hexagonal headed bolts (1) and remove the process connection from the sensor (4).
2. Remove the plastic disk (3), including the two O-ring seals (2).
3. Place one seal (2) in the groove of the process connection.
4. Place the metal ground ring (3) on the process connection.
5. Now place the second seal (2) in the groove of the ground ring.
6. Finally, mount the process connection on the sensor again.
With plastic process connections, note the max. torques for lubricated threads
(7 Nm / 5.2 lbf ft).
1
2 3 2
Fig. 20: Installing ground rings with Promag H (DN 2 to 25 / 1/12 to 1″)
1 = Hexagonal-headed bolt (process connection)
2 = O-ring seals
3 = Ground ring or plastic disk (spacer)
4 = Sensor
4 a0002651
Endress+Hauser 27
Installation Promag 50
«
Welding the transmitter into the piping (weld nipples)
Caution!
Risk of destroying the measuring electronics. Make sure that the welding machine is not grounded via the sensor or the transmitter.
1. Tack-weld the sensor into the pipe. A suitable welding jig can be ordered separately as
an accessory (→ 78).
2. Loosen the screws on the process connection flange and remove the sensor, complete with the seal, from the pipe.
3. Weld the process connection to the pipe.
4. Reinstall the sensor in the pipe. Make sure that everything is clean and that the seal is correctly seated.
!
Note!
• If thin-walled foodstuffs pipes are not welded correctly, the heat could damage the installed seal. It is therefore advisable to remove the sensor and the seal prior to welding.
• The pipe has to be spread approximately 8 mm to permit disassembly.
Cleaning with pigs
If pigs are used for cleaning, it is essential to take the inside diameters of the measuring tube and process connection into account. All the dimensions and lengths of the sensor and
transmitter are provided in the separate documentation «Technical Documentation» →
124.
28 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Installation
3.3.4
Installing the Promag L sensor
«
Caution!
• The protective covers mounted on the two sensor flanges (DN 50 to 300 / 2 to 12″) are used to hold the lap joint flanges in place and to protect the PTFE liner during transportation. Consequently, do not remove these covers until immediately before the sensor is installed in the pipe.
• The covers must remain in place while the device is in storage.
• Make sure that the lining is not damaged or removed from the flanges.
!
Note!
Bolts, nuts, seals, etc. are not included in the scope of supply and must be supplied by the customer.
The sensor is designed for installation between the two piping flanges.
• Observe in any case the necessary screw tightening torques on → 30
• If grounding disks are used, follow the mounting instructions which will be enclosed with the shipment
• To comply with the device specification, a concentrical installation in the measuring section is required
Endress+Hauser a0004296
Fig. 21: Installing the Promag L sensor
Seals
Comply with the following instructions when installing seals:
• Hard rubber lining additional seals are always necessary.
• Polyurethane lining no seals are required.
• PTFE lining no seals are required.
• For DIN flanges, use only seals according to EN 1514-1.
• Make sure that the seals do not protrude into the piping cross-section.
«
Caution!
Risk of short circuit!
Do not use electrically conductive sealing compounds such as graphite! An electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube and short-circuit the measuring signal.
Ground cable
• If necessary, special ground cables for potential equalization can be ordered as an
accessory (→ 78).
• Information on potential equalization and detailed mounting instructions for the use of
ground cables can be found on → 57.
29
Installation
30
Promag 50
Screw tightening torques (Promag L)
Please note the following:
• The tightening torques listed below are for lubricated threads only.
• Always tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence.
• Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals.
• The tightening torques listed below apply only to pipes not subjected to tensile stress.
Promag L tightening torques for EN (DIN)
Nominal diameter EN (DIN)
[mm]
50
65*
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
350
400
400
450
450
500
500
600
600
700
700
800
800
900
900
1000
1000
1200
Pressure rating
[bar]
PN 10/16
PN 10/16
PN 10/16
PN 10/16
PN 10/16
PN 10/16
PN 10
PN 10
PN 10
PN 6
PN 10
PN 6
PN 10
PN 6
PN 10
PN 6
PN 10
PN 6
PN 10
PN 6
PN 10
PN 6
PN 10
PN 6
PN 10
PN 6
PN 10
PN 6
Threaded fasteners
4 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 20
8 × M 20
12 × M 20
12 × M 20
12 × M 20
16 × M 20
16 × M 20
16 × M 24
16 × M 20
20 × M 24
20 × M 20
20 × M 24
20 × M 24
20 × M 27
24 × M 24
24 × M 27
24 × M 27
24 × M 30
24 × M 27
28 × M 30
28 × M 27
28 × M 33
32 × M 30
1200 PN 10 32 × M 36
* Designed acc. to EN 1092-1 (not to DIN 2501)
Hard rubber
Max. tightening torque
Polyurethane
[Nm] [Nm]
PTFE
[Nm]
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
111
112
90
151
112
153
119
155
139
206
148
246
206
331
230
316
218
402
319
564
171
147
219
139
246
182
316
637
307
208
405
299
568
55
120
118
98
167
126
133
123
30
50
65
50
15
10
15
20
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
100
—
—
—
55
90
130
90
40
22
30
42
Promag L tightening torques for ASME
Nominal diameter
[mm] [inch]
50 2″
80
100
3″
4″
150
200
250
300
350
400
6″
8″
10″
12″
14″
16″
ASME
Pressure rating
[lbs]
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Threaded fasteners
4 × 5/8″
4 × 5/8″
8 × 5/8″
8 × ¾»
8 × ¾»
12 × 7/8″
12 × 7/8″
12 × 1″
16 × 1″
Max. tightening torque
Hard rubber
[Nm] [lbf · ft]
Polyurethane
[Nm] [lbf · ft] [Nm]
PTFE
[lbf · ft]
—
—
—
—
15
25
11
18
40
65
29
48
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
20
45
65
55
15
33
48
41
44
90
125
100
32
66
92
74
—
135
128
—
100
94
68
158
150
56
117
111
115
—
—
85
—
—
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Endress+Hauser
Installation
Nominal diameter
[mm] [inch]
450
500
600
18″
20″
24″
ASME
Pressure rating
[lbs]
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Threaded fasteners
Max. tightening torque
16 × 1 1/8″
20 × 1 1/8″
20 × 1 ¼»
Hard rubber
[Nm] [lbf · ft]
Polyurethane
[Nm] [lbf · ft] [Nm]
PTFE
[lbf · ft]
204
183
268
150
135
198
234
217
307
173
160
226
—
—
—
—
—
—
Promag L tightening torques for AWWA
Nominal diameter
AWWA
Pressure rating
[mm] [inch]
700 28″
750
800
30″
32″
900
1000
1050
1200
36″
40″
42″
48″
Class D
Class D
Class D
Class D
Class D
Class D
Class D
Threaded fasteners
28 × 1 ¼»
28 × 1 ¼»
28 × 1 ½»
32 × 1 ½»
36 × 1 ½»
36 × 1 ½»
44 × 1 ½»
Max. tightening torque
Hartgummi Polyurethane PTFE
[Nm] [lbf · ft] [Nm] [lbf · ft] [Nm] [lbf · ft]
247
287
182
212
292
302
215
223
—
—
—
—
394
419
420
528
552
291
309
310
389
407
422
430
477
518
531
311
317
352
382
392
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Promag L tightening torques for AS 2129
Nominal diameter
AS 2129
Pressure rating
[mm]
350
400
450
500
600
700
750
800
900
1000
1200
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Threaded fasteners
12 × M 24
12 × M 24
16 × M 24
16 × M 24
16 × M 30
20 × M 30
20 × M 30
20 × M 30
24 × M 30
24 × M 30
32 × M 30
Promag L tightening torques for AS 4087
Nominal diameter
AS 4087
Pressure rating
Threaded fasteners
[mm]
350
375
400
450
500
600
700
750
800
900
1000
1200
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
12 × M 24
12 × M 24
12 × M 24
12 × M 24
16 × M 24
16 × M 27
20 × M 27
20 × M 30
20 × M 33
24 × M 33
24 × M 33
32 × M 33
Hard rubber
[Nm]
203
226
226
271
439
355
559
631
627
634
727
Max. tightening torque
Polyurethane
[Nm]
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Hard rubber
[Nm]
203
137
226
301
271
393
330
529
631
627
595
703
Max. tightening torque
Polyurethane
[Nm]
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PTFE
[Nm]
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PTFE
[Nm]
—
—
31
Installation Promag 50
3.3.5
Installing the Promag P sensor
«
Caution!
• The protective covers mounted on the two sensor flanges guard the PTFE, which is turned over the flanges. Consequently, do not remove these covers until immediately before the sensor is installed in the pipe.
• The covers must remain in place while the device is in storage.
• Make sure that the lining is not damaged or removed from the flanges.
!
Note!
Bolts, nuts, seals, etc. are not included in the scope of supply and must be supplied by the customer.
The sensor is designed for installation between the two piping flanges.
• Observe in any case the necessary screw tightening torques on → 33
• If grounding disks are used, follow the mounting instructions which will be enclosed with the shipment
32 a0004296
Fig. 22: Installing the Promag P sensor
Seals
Comply with the following instructions when installing seals:
• PFA or PTFE lining No seals are required!
• For DIN flanges, use only seals according to EN 1514-1.
• Make sure that the seals do not protrude into the piping cross-section.
«
Caution!
Risk of short circuit! Do not use electrically conductive sealing compounds such as graphite!
An electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube and shortcircuit the measuring signal.
Ground cable
• If necessary, special ground cables for potential equalization can be ordered as an
accessory (→ 78).
• Information on potential equalization and detailed mounting instructions for the use of
ground cables can be found on → 55
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Installation
Installing the high-temperature version (with PFA lining)
The high-temperature version has a housing support for the thermal separation of sensor and transmitter. The high-temperature version is always used for applications in which high ambient temperatures are encountered in conjunction with high fluid temperatures. The high-temperature version is obligatory if the fluid temperature exceeds +150 °C.
!
Note!
You will find information on permissible temperature ranges on → 103
Insulation
Pipes generally have to be insulated if they carry very hot fluids, in order to avoid energy losses and to prevent accidental contact with pipes at temperatures that could cause injury.
Guidelines regulating the insulation of pipes have to be taken into account.
«
Caution!
Risk of measuring electronics overheating. The housing support dissipates heat and its entire surface area must remain uncovered. Make sure that the sensor insulation does not extend past the top of the two sensor shells.
max.
—
Esc
+ E
Endress+Hauser
A0004300
Fig. 23: Promag P (high-temperature version): Insulating the pipe
Tightening torques for threaded fasteners (Promag P)
Please note the following:
• The tightening torques listed below are for lubricated threads only.
• Always tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence.
• Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals.
• The tightening torques listed below apply only to pipes not subjected to tensile stress.
Tightening torques for:
• EN (DIN) → 34
• ASME → 34
• JIS → 35
• AS 2129 → 35
• AS 4087 → 35
33
Installation
34
Promag 50
Promag P tightening torques for EN (DIN)
300
300
350
350
350
400
400
400
150
200
200
200
250
250
250
300
Nominal diameter
[mm]
15
25
32
40
50
65 *
65
80
80
100
100
125
125
150
EN (DIN)
Pressure rating [bar]
PN 40
PN 40
PN 40
PN 40
PN 40
PN 16
PN 40
PN 16
PN 40
PN 16
PN 40
PN 16
PN 40
PN 16
450
450
450
500
500
500
600
600 *
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 10
PN 16
600 PN 25
* Designed acc. to EN 1092-1 (not to DIN 2501)
PN 16
PN 25
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 40
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 10
Promag P tightening torques for ASME
Nominal diameter
[mm]
15
15
25
25
40
40
50
50
80
[inch]
½»
½»
1″
1″
1 ½»
1 ½»
2″
2″
3″
ASME
Pressure rating [lbs]
Class 150
Class 300
Class 150
Class 300
Class 150
Class 300
Class 150
Class 300
Class 150
Threaded fasteners
4 × ½»
4 × ½»
4 × ½»
4 × 5/8″
4 × ½»
4 × ¾»
4 × 5/8″
8 × 5/8″
4 × 5/8″
Threaded fasteners
12 × M 20
12 × M 24
12 × M 20
12 × M 24
12 × M 27
12 × M 20
12 × M 24
16 × M 27
16 × M 20
16 × M 24
16 × M 30
16 × M 24
16 × M 27
16 × M 33
20 × M 24
20 × M 27
4 × M 12
4 × M 12
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 20
8 × M 16
8 × M 24
8 × M 20
8 × M 24
8 × M 20
20 × M 33
20 × M 24
20 × M 30
20 × M 33
20 × M 27
20 × M 33
20 × M 36
[Nm]
6
6
11
14
24
34
47
23
79
Max. tightening torque
PTFE PFA
[lbf · ft]
4
[Nm]
–
[lbf · ft]
–
4
8
10
18
25
35
17
58
–
10
12
21
31
44
22
67
–
7
9
15
23
32
16
49
179
204
188
254
380
260
330
488
136
141
94
138
110
131
200
125
235
300
385
265
448
533
345
658
731
78
75
111
99
43
53
53
57
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
PTFE PFA
11
26
–
20
41
52
65
43
35
47
59
40
70
67
99
85
40
48
48
51
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
120
101
67
105
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Endress+Hauser
Installation
Nominal diameter
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
[mm]
80
100
100
150
150
200
10″
12″
14″
16″
18″
20″
24″
[inch]
3″
4″
6″
8″
4″
6″
ASME
Pressure rating [lbs]
Class 300
Class 150
Class 300
Class 150
Class 300
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Promag P tightening torques for JIS
Nominal diameter
[mm]
25
25
32
32
40
40
80
80
100
100
50
50
65
65
125
125
150
150
200
200
250
250
300
300
JIS
Pressure rating
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
Threaded fasteners
8 × ¾»
8 × 5/8″
8 × ¾»
8 × ¾»
12 × ¾»
8 × ¾»
12 × 7/8″
12 × 7/8″
12 × 1″
16 × 1″
16 × 1 1/8″
20 × 1 1/8″
20 × 1 ¼»
Threaded fasteners
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
8 × M 16
4 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 20
8 × M 16
8 × M 20
8 × M 20
8 × M 22
8 × M 20
12 × M 22
12 × M 20
12 × M 22
12 × M 22
12 × M 24
16 × M 22
16 × M 24
135
178
260
246
371
341
477
[Nm]
47
56
67
106
73
143
Max. tightening torque
PTFE PFA
[lbf · ft]
35
41
[Nm]
42
50
[lbf · ft]
31
37
49
78
54
105
100
131
192
181
59
86
67
109
–
–
–
–
274
252
352
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
44
63
49
80
–
–
–
80
121
99
108
82
121
133
212
99
183
38
57
47
75
54
27
74
37
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
PTFE PFA
32
32
27
27
38
38
41
41
–
–
37
37
32
46
38
58
46
23
63
31
54
88
–
–
66
103
81
72
–
–
Promag P tightening torques for AS 2129
Nominal diameter
[mm]
25
50
AS 2129
Pressure rating
Table E
Table E
Threaded fasteners
4 × M 12
4 × M 16
Promag P tightening torques for AS 4087
Nominal diameter
[mm]
50
AS 4087
Pressure rating
PN 16
Threaded fasteners
4 × M 16
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
PTFE
21
42
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
PTFE
42
35
Installation Promag 50
3.3.6
Installing the Promag W sensor
!
Note!
Bolts, nuts, seals, etc. are not included in the scope of supply and must be supplied by the customer.
The sensor is designed for installation between the two piping flanges.
• Observe in any case the necessary screw tightening torques on → 36
• If grounding disks are used, follow the mounting instructions which will be enclosed with the shipment
36 a0004296
Fig. 24: Installing the Promag W sensor
Seals
Comply with the following instructions when installing seals:
• Hard rubber lining additional seals are always necessary.
• Polyurethane lining no seals are required.
• For DIN flanges, use only seals according to EN 1514-1.
• Make sure that the seals do not protrude into the piping cross-section.
«
Caution!
Risk of short circuit!
Do not use electrically conductive sealing compounds such as graphite! An electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube and short-circuit the measuring signal.
Ground cable
• If necessary, special ground cables for potential equalization can be ordered as an
accessory (→ 78).
• Information on potential equalization and detailed mounting instructions for the use of
ground cables can be found on → 57
Screw tightening torques (Promag W)
Please note the following:
• The tightening torques listed below are for lubricated threads only.
• Always tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence.
• Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals.
• The tightening torques listed below apply only to pipes not subjected to tensile stress.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Endress+Hauser
Installation
Tightening torques for:
• EN (DIN)→ 37
• JIS→ 39
• ASME→ 38
• AWWA → 39
• AS 2129 → 40
• AS 4087 → 40
Promag W tightening torques for EN (DIN)
300
300
350
350
350
350
400
400
150
200
200
200
250
250
250
300
65
80
80
100
100
125
125
150
Nominal diameter
[mm]
25
32
40
50
65*
500
500
600
600
600 *
600
700
700
700
400
400
450
450
450
450
500
500
EN (DIN)
PN 6
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 6
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 16
PN 25
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
Pressure rating [bar]
PN 40
PN 40
PN 40
PN 40
PN 16
PN 40
PN 16
PN 40
PN 16
PN 40
PN 16
PN 40
PN 16
PN 40
PN 10
PN 6
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 6
PN 10
PN 16
PN 6
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 6
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
8 × M 20
12 × M 20
12 × M 24
12 × M 20
12 × M 24
12 × M 27
12 × M 20
12 × M 24
16 × M 27
12 × M 20
16 × M 20
16 × M 24
16 × M 30
16 × M 20
16 × M 24
16 × M 27
Threaded fasteners
4 × M 12
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 20
8 × M 16
8 × M 24
8 × M 20
8 × M 24
16 × M 33
16 × M 20
20 × M 24
20 × M 27
20 × M 33
20 × M 20
20 × M 24
20 × M 30
20 × M 33
20 × M 24
20 × M 27
20 × M 33
20 × M 36
24 × M 24
24 × M 27
24 × M 33
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
111
112
152
227
90
151
193
289
70
104
82
98
150
94
134
153
Hard rubber
—
—
—
48
32
32
40
83
74
104
106
40
43
59
56
139
206
415
431
148
246
278
112
153
198
256
119
155
275
317
120
118
165
252
98
167
215
326
134
81
118
138
61
92
71
85
Polyurethane
15
24
31
40
27
27
34
71
63
88
91
34
36
50
48
147
219
443
516
139
246
318
126
133
196
253
123
171
300
360
37
Installation
38
Promag 50
Nominal diameter
[mm]
700
800
800
800
800
900
900
900
900
1000
1000
1000
1000
1200
1200
1200
1400
1400
1400
1600
1600
1600
1800
1800
1800
2000
2000
2000
EN (DIN)
Pressure rating [bar]
PN 25
PN 6
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 6
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 6
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 6
PN 10
PN 16
PN 6
PN 10
PN 16
PN 6
PN 10
PN 16
PN 6
PN 10
PN 16
PN 6
PN 10
PN 16
* Designed acc. to EN 1092-1 (not to DIN 2501)
Promag W tightening torques for ASME
Nominal diameter
80
100
100
150
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
[mm]
25
25
40
40
50
50
80
6″
8″
10″
12″
4″
6″
3″
4″
14″
16″
18″
20″
24″
[inch]
1″
1″
1 ½»
1 ½»
2″
2″
3″
ASME
Pressure rating
[lbs]
Class 150
Class 300
Class 150
Class 300
Class 150
Class 300
Class 150
Class 300
Class 150
Class 300
Class 150
Class 300
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Threaded fasteners
4 × ½»
4 × 5/8″
4 × ½»
4 × ¾»
4 × 5/8″
8 × 5/8″
4 × 5/8″
8 × ¾»
8 × 5/8″
8 × ¾»
8 × ¾»
12 × ¾»
8 × ¾»
12 × 7/8″
12 × 7/8″
12 × 1″
16 × 1″
16 × 1 1/8″
20 × 1 1/8″
20 × 1 ¼»
32 × M 36
32 × M 45
36 × M 33
36 × M 39
36 × M 45
40 × M 33
40 × M 45
40 × M 52
44 × M 36
44 × M 45
44 × M 52
48 × M 39
48 × M 45
48 × M 56
Threaded fasteners
24 × M 39
24 × M 27
24 × M 30
24 × M 36
24 × M 45
24 × M 27
28 × M 30
28 × M 36
28 × M 45
28 × M 27
28 × M 33
28 × M 39
28 × M 52
32 × M 30
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
547
961
1108
629
1047
1324
564
701
430
654
729
440
946
1007
Hard rubber
449
206
331
369
664
230
316
353
690
218
402
502
970
319
521
895
1003
605
1092
1261
568
753
398
618
762
417
893
1100
Polyurethane
507
182
316
385
721
637
307
398
716
208
405
518
971
299
101
133
135
128
204
183
268
58
79
70
107
18
60
38
42
Max. tightening torque
Hard rubber Polyurethane
[Nm]
—
[lbf · ft]
—
[Nm]
7
[lbf · ft]
5
—
—
—
35
—
—
—
26
8
10
15
22
6
7
11
16
13
44
28
31
43
58
52
79
11
43
26
31
40
59
51
80
30
44
38
59
8
32
19
23
74
98
100
94
150
135
198
75
103
158
150
234
217
307
55
76
117
111
173
160
226
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Installation
Promag W tightening torques for JIS
Nominal diameter
[mm]
25
25
32
32
40
40
80
80
100
100
50
50
65
65
125
125
150
150
200
200
250
250
300
300
JIS
Pressure rating
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
10K
20K
Promag W tightening torques for AWWA
Nominal diameter
[mm]
700
750
800
900
1000
1050
1200
1350
1500
1650
1800
2000
[inch]
28″
30″
32″
36″
40″
42″
48″
54″
60″
66″
72″
78″
AWWA
Pressure rating
Class D
Class D
Class D
Class D
Class D
Class D
Class D
Class D
Class D
Class D
Class D
Class D
Threaded fasteners
28 × 1 ¼»
28 × 1 ¼»
28 × 1 ½»
32 × 1 ½»
36 × 1 ½»
36 × 1 ½»
44 × 1 ½»
44 × 1 ¾»
52 × 1 ¾»
52 × 1 ¾»
60 × 1 ¾»
64 × 2″
Threaded fasteners
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
8 × M 16
4 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 20
8 × M 16
8 × M 20
8 × M 20
8 × M 22
8 × M 20
12 × M 22
12 × M 20
12 × M 22
12 × M 22
12 × M 24
16 × M 22
16 × M 24
61
91
100
159
60
91
75
81
74
138
29
42
35
56
40
20
55
28
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
Hard rubber Polyurethane
—
—
19
19
—
—
—
—
22
22
24
24
23
35
29
48
33
17
45
23
52
80
87
144
51
79
63
72
63
124
528
552
730
758
946
975
853
Max. tightening torque
Hard rubber Polyurethane
[Nm]
247
[lbf · ft]
182
[Nm]
292
[lbf · ft]
215
287
394
419
420
212
291
309
310
302
422
430
477
223
311
317
352
389
407
538
559
698
719
629
518
531
633
832
955
1087
786
382
392
467
614
704
802
580
Endress+Hauser 39
Installation Promag 50
Promag W tightening torques for AS 2129
Nominal diameter
[mm]
50
80
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
750
800
900
1000
1200
AS 2129
Pressure rating
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Table E
Threaded fasteners
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
8 × M 16
8 × M 20
8 × M 20
12 × M 20
12 × M 24
12 × M 24
12 × M 24
16 × M 24
16 × M 24
16 × M 30
20 × M 30
20 × M 30
20 × M 30
24 × M 30
24 × M 30
32 × M 30
Promag W tightening torques for AS 4087
Nominal diameter
[mm]
50
80
100
150
200
250
300
350
375
400
450
500
600
700
750
800
900
1000
1200
AS 4087
Pressure rating
Table E
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
PN 16
Threaded fasteners
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
4 × M 16
8 × M 20
8 × M 20
8 × M 20
12 × M 24
12 × M 24
12 × M 24
12 × M 24
12 × M 24
16 × M 24
16 × M 27
20 × M 27
20 × M 30
20 × M 33
24 × M 33
24 × M 33
32 × M 33
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
Hard rubber
32
49
38
64
96
98
123
203
226
226
271
439
355
559
631
627
634
727
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
Hard rubber
32
49
76
52
77
147
103
203
137
226
301
271
393
330
529
631
627
595
703
40 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Installation
3.3.7
Turning the transmitter housing
Turning the aluminum field housing
#
Warning!
The turning mechanism in devices with Ex d/de or FM/CSA Cl. I Div. 1 classification is not the same as that described here. The procedure for turning these housings is described in the
Ex-specific documentation.
1. Loosen the two securing screws.
2. Turn the bayonet catch as far as it will go.
3. Carefully lift the transmitter housing:
– Promag D: approx. 10 mm (0.39 inch) above the securing screws
– Promag E/H/L/P/W: to the stop
4. Turn the transmitter housing to the desired position:
– Promag D: max. 180° clockwise or max. 180° counterclockwise
– Promag E/H/L/P/W: max. 280° clockwise or max. 20° counterclockwise
5. Lower the housing into position and re-engage the bayonet catch.
6. Retighten the two securing screws.
4
2
5
1
3
6 a0004302
Fig. 25: Turning the transmitter housing (aluminum field housing)
Turning the stainless-steel field housing
1. Loosen the two securing screws.
2. Carefully lift the transmitter housing as far as it will go.
3. Turn the transmitter housing to the desired position (max. 2 × 90° in either direction).
4. Lower the housing into position.
5. Retighten the two securing screws.
£
180° c
£
180° a b
Fig. 26: Turning the transmitter housing (stainless-steel field housing)
e d a0004303
Endress+Hauser 41
Installation Promag 50
3.3.8
Turning the onsite display
1. Unscrew the cover of the electronics compartment from the transmitter housing.
2. Press the side latches on the display module and remove it from the electronics compartment cover plate.
3. Turn the display to the desired position (max. 4 × 45° in both directions) and reset it onto the cover plate of the electronics compartment.
4. Screw the cover of the electronics compartment firmly back onto the transmitter housing.
4 x 45° a0003236
Fig. 27: Turning the local display (field housing)
42 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Installation
3.3.9
Installing the wall-mount housing
There are various ways of installing the wall-mount transmitter housing:
• Direct wall mounting
• Installation in control panel (with separate mounting kit, accessories) → 44
• Pipe mounting (with separate mounting kit, accessories) → 44
«
Caution!
• Make sure that the ambient temperature does not exceed the permissible range at the mounting location, –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F), optional –40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F).
Install the device at a shady location. Avoid direct sunlight.
• Always install the wall-mount housing in such a way that the cable entries are pointing down.
Direct wall mounting
1. Drill the holes as illustrated in the graphic.
2. Remove the cover of the connection compartment (a).
3. Push the two securing screws (b) through the appropriate bores (c) in the housing.
– Securing screws (M6): max. Ø 6.5 mm (0.26″)
– Screw head: max. Ø 10.5 mm (0.41″)
4. Secure the transmitter housing to the wall as indicated.
5. Screw the cover of the connection compartment (a) firmly onto the housing.
35 (1.38) b
90 (3.54)
Fig. 28: Mounted directly on the wall
a c
192 (7.56) a0001130
Endress+Hauser 43
Installation Promag 50
Panel-mounted installation
1. Prepare the opening in the panel as illustrated in the graphic.
2. Slide the housing into the opening in the panel from the front.
3. Screw the fasteners onto the wall-mount housing.
4. Place the threaded rods in the fasteners and screw them down until the housing is seated tightly against the panel. Afterwards, tighten the locking nuts.
Additional support is not necessary.
210 (8.27)
+0.5 (+0.019)
–0.5 (–0.019)
+0.5 (+0.019)
–0.5 (–0.019)
245 (9.65)
~110 (~4.33) a0001131
Fig. 29: Panel installation (wall-mount housing)
Pipe mounting
«
The assembly should be performed by following the instructions in the graphic.
Caution!
If the device is mounted to a warm pipe, make certain that the housing temperature does not exceed +60 °C (+140 °F), which is the maximum permissible temperature.
Ø 20…70
(Ø 0.79…2.75)
44
Fig. 30: Pipe mounting (wall-mount housing)
~ 155 ( ~ 6.1) a0001132
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Installation
3.4
Post-installation check
Perform the following checks after installing the measuring device in the pipe:
Device condition and specifications
Is the device damaged (visual inspection)?
Does the device correspond to specifications at the measuring point, including process temperature and pressure, ambient temperature, minimum fluid conductivity, measuring range, etc.?
Installation
Does the arrow on the sensor nameplate match the actual direction of flow through the pipe?
Is the position of the measuring electrode plane correct?
Is the position of the empty pipe detection electrode correct?
Were all screws tightened to the specified torques when the sensor was installed?
Notes
—
→ 103
Notes
—
Were the correct seals used (type, material, installation)?
Are the measuring point number and labeling correct (visual inspection)?
Process environment / process conditions
Were the inlet and outlet runs respected?
Is the measuring device protected against moisture and direct sunlight?
Is the sensor adequately protected against vibration (attachment, support)?
→ 14
→ 14
Promag D → 22
Promag E → 24
Promag L → 30
Promag P → 33
Promag W → 36
Promag D → 20
Promag E → 23
Promag H → 26
Promag L→ 29
Promag P → 32
Promag W → 36
—
Notes
Inlet run 5 × DN
Outlet run 2 × DN
—
Acceleration up to 2 g by analogy with IEC 600 68-2-8
Endress+Hauser 45
Wiring Promag 50
4
#
Warning!
Wiring
When connecting Ex-certified devices, see the notes and diagrams in the Ex-specific supplement to these Operating Instructions.
Please do not hesitate to contact your Endress+Hauser representative if you have any questions.
!
Note!
The device does not have an internal circuit breaker. For this reason, assign the device a switch or power-breaker switch capable of disconnecting the power supply line from the mains.
4.1
Connecting the remote version
4.1.1
Connecting Promag D/E/H/L/P/W
#
Warning!
• Risk of electric shock! Switch off the power supply before opening the device. Do not install or wire the device while it is connected to the power supply. Failure to comply with this precaution can result in irreparable damage to the electronics.
• Risk of electric shock! Connect the protective conductor to the ground terminal on the housing before the power supply is applied.
«
Caution!
• Only sensors and transmitters with the same serial number can be connected to one another. Communication problems can occur if the devices are not connected in this way.
• Risk of damaging the coil driver. Always switch off the power supply before connecting or disconnecting the coil cable.
Procedure
1. Transmitter: Remove the cover from the connection compartment (a).
2. Sensor: Remove the cover from the connection housing (b).
3. Feed the signal cable (c) and the coil cable (d) through the appropriate cable entries.
«
Caution!
Route the connecting cables securely (see «Connecting cable length» → 19).
4. Terminate the signal and coil current cable as indicated in the table:
Promag D/E/L/P/W Refer to the table → 49
Promag H Refer to the «Cable termination» table → 50
5. Establish the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
The electrical wiring diagram that applies to your device can be found:
‣
In the corresponding graphic:
→ 31 (Promag D) → 32 (Promag E/L/P/W); → 33 (Promag H)
‣
In the cover of the sensor and transmitter
!
Note!
The cable shields of the Promag H sensor are grounded by means of the strain relief
terminals (see also the «Cable termination» table → 50)
«
Caution!
Insulate the shields of cables that are not connected to eliminate the risk of shortcircuits with neighboring cable shields inside the connection housing.
6. Transmitter: Screw the cover on the connection compartment (a).
7. Sensor: Secure the cover on the connection housing (b).
46 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Wiring
Promag D c a
6 5 7 8 4 37 36 c d b n.c.
n.c.
5 7 4 37 d
42 41
42 41
Fig. 31: c d a b n.c.
Connecting the remote version of Promag D
Wall-mount housing connection compartment
Cover of the sensor connection housing
Signal cable
Coil current cable
Not connected, insulated cable shields
Wire colors/Terminal No.:
5/6 = braun, 7/8 = white, 4 = green, 37/36 = yellow
Promag E/L/P/W c a
6 5 7 8 4 37 36 c d b n.c.
n.c.
5 7 4 37 n.c.
d
42 41
42 41
Fig. 32: c d a b n.c.
Connecting the remote version of Promag E/L/P/W
Wall-mount housing connection compartment
Cover of the sensor connection housing
Signal cable
Coil current cable
Not connected, insulated cable shields
Wire colors/Terminal No.:
5/6 = braun, 7/8 = white, 4 = green, 37/36 = yellow
A0010882
A0011722
Endress+Hauser 47
Wiring
Promag H c a
6 5 7 8 4 37 36 c d b n.c.
n.c.
5 7 4 37 n.c.
Fig. 33: Connecting the remote version of Promag H c d a b n.c.
Wall-mount housing connection compartment
Cover of the sensor connection housing
Signal cable
Coil current cable
Not connected, insulated cable shields
Wire colors/Terminal No.:
5/6 = braun, 7/8 = white, 4 = green, 37/36 = yellow
d
42 41
2 1
42 41
Promag 50
A0011747
48 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Wiring
Cable termination for the remote version
Promag D/E/L/P/W
Terminate the signal and coil current cables as shown in the figure below (Detail A).
Ferrules must be provided on the fine-wire cores (Detail B: m = red ferrules, 1.0 mm; n = white ferrules, 0.5 mm).
* Stripping only for reinforced cables
«
Caution!
When fitting the connectors, pay attention to the following points:
• Signal cable Make sure that the ferrules do not touch the wire shield on the sensor side.
Minimum distance = 1 mm (exception «GND» = green cable)
• Coil current cable Insulate one core of the three-core wire at the level of the core reinforcement; you only require two cores for the connection.
TRANSMITTER
Signal cable Coil current cable mm (inch)
17 (0.67)
8 (0.31)
100 (3.94)*
80 (3.15)
50 (1.97) mm (inch)
90 (3.54)*
70 (2.76)
50 (1.97)
10 (0.39)
8 (0.31)
A n m m m n m n n
GND
B
SENSOR
Signal cable
20 (0.79)*
170 (6.69)*
80 (3.15)
50 (1.97) 17 (0.67)
8 (0.31) mm (inch)
A0002687
Coil current cable m m m
20 (0.79)* 160 (6.30)*
70 (2.76)
50 (1.97)
10 (0.39)
8 (0.31)
B
A mm (inch)
A0002688
A
B
GND m n m n
³1 (0.04) n
A0002646
A
B m m m
A0002650
Endress+Hauser 49
Wiring Promag 50
Cable termination for the remote version
Promag H
Terminate the signal and coil current cables as shown in the figure below (Detail A).
Ferrules must be provided on the fine-wire cores (Detail B: m = red ferrules, 1.0 mm; n = white ferrules, 0.5 mm).
«
Caution!
When fitting the connectors, pay attention to the following points:
• Signal cable Make sure that the ferrules do not touch the wire shield on the sensor side.
Minimum distance = 1 mm (exception «GND» = green cable).
• Coil current cable Insulate one core of the three-core wire at the level of the core reinforcement; you only require two cores for the connection.
• On the sensor side, reverse both cable shields approx. 15 mm over the outer jacket. The strain relief ensures an electrical connection with the connection housing.
TRANSMITTER
Signal cable Coil current cable mm (inch)
17 (0.67)
8 (0.31)
80 (3.15)
50 (1.97) mm (inch)
8 (0.31)
70 (2.76)
50 (1.97)
10 (0.39)
A
A n m m m n m n n
GND
B
A0002686
SENSOR
Signal cable
15 (0.59)
80 (3.15)
17 (0.67)
8 (0.31) m m m
Coil current cable
15 ( 0.59
)
70 (2.76)
40 (1.57)
8 (0.31)
B
A0002684
A
A
B
GND m n n n mm (inch)
A0002647
B m m mm (inch)
A0002648
50 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Wiring
4.1.2
Cable specifications
Signal cable
• 3 × 0.38 mm² PVC cable with common, braided copper shield ( 7 mm) and individually shielded cores
• With Empty Pipe Detection (EPD): 4 × 0.38 mm² PVC cable with common, braided copper shield ( 7 mm) and individually shielded cores
• Conductor resistance: 50 km
• Capacitance: core/shield: 420 pF/m
• Permanent operating temperature: –20 to +80 °C
• Cable cross-section: max. 2.5 mm²
Coil cable
• 2 × 0.75 mm² PVC cable with common, braided copper shield ( 7 mm)
• Conductor resistance: 37 km
• Capacitance: core/core, shield grounded: 120 pF/m
• Operating temperature: –20 to +80 °C
• Cable cross-section: max. 2.5 mm²
• Test voltage for cable insulation: 1433 V AC r.m.s. 50/60 Hz or 2026 V DC
5
6
7
3
4
1
2 a b
A0003194
5
6
7
3
4
1
2 a b
Signal cable
Coil current cable
Core
Core insulation
Core shield
Core jacket
Core reinforcement
Cable shield
Outer jacket
Reinforced connecting cables
As an option, Endress+Hauser can also deliver reinforced connecting cables with an additional, reinforcing metal braid. Reinforced connecting cables should be used when laying the cable directly in the ground, if there is a risk of damage from rodents or if using the measuring device below IP 68 degree of protection.
Operation in zones of severe electrical interference:
The measuring device complies with the general safety requirements in accordance with
EN 61010 and the EMC requirements of IEC/EN 61326.
«
Caution!
Grounding is by means of the ground terminals provided for the purpose inside the connection housing. Ensure that the stripped and twisted lengths of cable shield to the ground terminal are as short as possible.
Endress+Hauser 51
Wiring Promag 50
4.2
Connecting the measuring unit
4.2.1
Connecting the transmitter
#
Warning!
• Risk of electric shock! Switch off the power supply before opening the device. Do not install or wire the device while it is energized. Failure to comply with this precaution can result in irreparable damage to the electronics.
• Risk of electric shock! Connect the protective conductor to the ground terminal on the housing before the power supply is applied (not necessary if the power supply is galvanically isolated).
• Compare the specifications on the nameplate with the local voltage supply and frequency.
Also comply with national regulations governing the installation of electrical equipment.
1. Remove the cover of the connection compartment (f) from the transmitter housing.
2. Feed the power supply cable (a) and the signal cable (b) through the appropriate cable entries.
3. Perform the wiring:
– Wiring diagram (aluminum housing) → 35
– Wiring diagram (stainless steel housing) → 36
– Wiring diagram (wall-mount housing) → 37
– Terminal assignment → 54
4. Screw the cover of the connection compartment (f) firmly onto the transmitter housing.
f b a e
– 27
+ 26
– 25
+ 24
– 23
+ 22
– 21
+ 20
N (L-)
L1 (L+)
2
1 g b d c a a0004582
d e c b f g
Fig. 35: a
Connecting the transmitter (aluminum field housing). Cable cross-section: max. 2.5 mm
Cable for power supply: 85 to 260 V AC, 20 to 55 V AC, 16 to 62 V DC
Terminal No. 1: L1 for AC, L+ for DC
Terminal No. 2: N for AC, L- for DC
Signal cable: Terminals Nos. 20–27 → 54
Ground terminal for protective ground
Ground terminal for signal cable shield
Service connector for connecting service interface FXA193 (Fieldcheck, FieldCare)
Cover of the connection compartment
Securing clamp
52 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Wiring b a f e
– 27
+ 26
– 25
+ 24
– 23
+ 22
– 21
+ 20
N (L-)
L1 (L+)
2
1
f d e b c
Fig. 36: a
Connecting the transmitter (stainless steel field housing); cable cross-section: max. 2.5 mm
Cable for power supply: 85 to 260 V AC, 20 to 55 V AC, 16 to 62 V DC
Terminal No. 1: L1 for AC, L+ for DC
Terminal No. 2: N for AC, L- for DC
Signal cable: Terminals Nos. 20–27 → 54
Ground terminal for protective ground
Ground terminal for signal cable shield
Service connector for connecting service interface FXA193 (Fieldcheck, FieldCare)
Cover of the connection compartment
N (L-)
L1 (L+)
1 2
+ –
20 21
+
22
–
23
+ –
24
25
+ –
26
27 e b d c a a0004584 f a b a c b d
f d e b c
Fig. 37: a
Connecting the transmitter (wall-mount housing); cable cross-section: max. 2.5 mm
Cable for power supply: 85 to 260 V AC, 20 to 55 V AC, 16 to 62 V DC
Terminal No. 1: L1 for AC, L+ for DC
Terminal No. 2: N for AC, L- for DC
Signal cable: Terminals Nos. 20–27 → 54
Ground terminal for protective ground
Ground terminal for signal cable shield
Service connector for connecting service interface FXA193 (Fieldcheck, FieldCare)
Cover of the connection compartment
a0001135
Endress+Hauser 53
Wiring Promag 50
4.2.2
Terminal assignment
Order version
50***-***********W
Terminal No. (inputs / outputs)
20 (+) / 21 (–) 22 (+) / 23 (–)
—
50***-***********A
50***-***********D
50***-***********S
50***-***********T
—
Status input
—
—
—
Status output
—
—
24 (+) / 25 (–)
—
Frequency output
Frequency output
Frequency output
Ex i
Frequency output
Ex i
26 (+) / 27 (–)
Current output
HART
Current output
HART
Current output
HART
Current output, Ex i, active, HART
Current output, Ex i, passive, HART
!
Note!
Functional values of the inputs and outputs → 98
4.2.3
HART connection
Users have the following connection options at their disposal:
• Direct connection to transmitter by means of terminals 26(+) and 27 ()
• Connection by means of the 4 to 20 mA circuit.
!
Note!
• The measuring loop’s minimum load must be at least 250 .
• After commissioning, make the following settings:
• CURRENT SPAN function «4–20 mA HART»
• Switch HART write protection on or off → 65
Connection of the HART handheld communicator
See also the documentation issued by the HART Communication Foundation, and in particular HCF LIT 20: «HART, a technical summary».
³ 250 Ω
-27
+26
2
4 3
1
Fig. 38:
3
4
1
2
Electrical connection of HART handheld Field Xpert SFX100
HART handheld Field Xpert SFX100
Auxiliary energy
Shielding
Other devices or PLC with passive input
a0004586
54 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Connection of a PC with an operating software
In order to connect a PC with operating software (e.g. «FieldCare»), a HART modem
(e.g. «Commubox FXA195») is needed.
³ 250 Ω
4
–27
+26
2
3
1
Wiring
5
Fig. 39:
3
4
1
2
5
Electrical connection of a PC with operating software
PC with operating software
Auxiliary energy
Shielding
Other devices or PLC with passive input
HART modem, e.g. Commubox FXA195
a0004592
4.3
Potential equalization
#
Warning!
The measuring system must be included in the potential equalization.
Perfect measurement is only ensured when the fluid and the sensor have the same electrical potential. This is ensured by the reference electrode integrated in the sensor as standard.
The following should also be taken into consideration for potential equalization:
• Internal grounding concepts in the company
• Operating conditions, such as the material/grounding of the pipes (see Table)
4.3.1
Potential equalization for Promag D
• No reference electrode is integrated!
For the two ground disks of the sensor an electrical connection to the fluid is always ensured.
• Exampels for connections → 56
4.3.2
Potential equalization for Promag E/L/P/W
• Reference electrode integrated in the sensor as standard
• Exampels for connections → 57
4.3.3
Potential equalization for Promag H
No reference electrode is integrated!
For the metal process connections of the sensor an electrical connection to the fluid is always ensured.
«
Caution!
If using process connections made of a synthetic material, ground rings have to be used to
ensure that potential is equalized (→ 27). The necessary ground rings can be ordered
separately from Endress+Hauser as accessories (→ 78).
Endress+Hauser 55
Wiring Promag 50
4.3.4
Exampels for potential equalization connections for Promag D
Standard case
Operating conditions
When using the measuring device in a:
• Metal, grounded pipe
• Plastic pipe
• Pipe with insulating lining
Potential equalization takes place via the ground terminal of the transmitter (standard situation).
!
Note!
When installing in metal pipes, we recommend you connect the ground terminal of the transmitter housing with the piping.
Potential equalization
Fig. 40:
a00012172
Via the ground terminal of the transmitter
Special cases
Operating conditions
When using the measuring device in a:
• Metal pipe that is not grounded
This connection method also applies in situations where:
• Customary potential equalization cannot be ensured
• Excessively high equalizing currents can be expected
Potential equalization takes place via the ground terminal of the transmitter and the two pipe flanges.
Here, the ground cable (copper wire, 6 mm² / 0.0093 in flange screws.
mounted directly on the conductive flange coating with
) is
Potential equalization
Fig. 41:
a00012173
Via the ground terminal of the transmitter and the flanges of the pipe .
When using the measuring device in a:
• Pipe with a cathodic protection unit
The device is installed potential-free in the pipe.
Only the two flanges of the pipe are connected with a ground cable (copper wire, 6 mm² (0.0093 in coating with flange screws.
)). Here, the ground cable is mounted directly on the conductive flange
Note the following when installing:
• The applicable regulations regarding potential-free installation must be observed.
• There should be no electrically conductive connection between the pipe and the device.
• The mounting material must withstand the applicable torques.
1
2
2
1
2
Fig. 42: Potential equalization and cathodic protection
a00012174
Power supply isolation transformer
Electrically isolated
56 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Endress+Hauser
Wiring
4.3.5
Exampels for potential equalization connections for
Promag E/L/P/W
Standard case
Operating conditions
When using the measuring device in a:
• Metal, grounded pipe
Potential equalization takes place via the ground terminal of the transmitter (standard situation).
!
Note!
When installing in metal pipes, we recommend you connect the ground terminal of the transmitter housing with the piping.
Potential equalization
Fig. 43:
A0011892
Via the ground terminal of the transmitter
Special cases
Operating conditions
When using the measuring device in a:
• Metal pipe that is not grounded
This connection method also applies in situations where:
• Customary potential equalization cannot be ensured
• Excessively high equalizing currents can be expected
Both sensor flanges are connected to the pipe flange by means of a ground cable (copper wire, 6 mm² / 0.0093 in
and grounded. Connect the transmitter or sensor connection housing, as applicable, to ground potential by means of the ground terminal provided for the purpose.
)
Ground cable installation depends on the nominal diameter:
• DN 300 (12″): The ground cable is mounted directly on the conductive flange coating with the flange screws.
• DN 350 (14″): The ground cable is mounted directly on the metal transport bracket.
!
Note!
The ground cable for flange-to-flange connections can be ordered separately as an accessory from Endress+Hauser.
Potential equalization
DN
£
300 DN
³
350
Fig. 44:
A0011893
Via the ground terminal of the transmitter and the flanges of the pipe
When using the measuring device in a:
• Plastic pipe
• Pipe with insulating lining
This connection method also applies in situations where:
• Customary potential equalization cannot be ensured
• Excessively high equalizing currents can be expected
Potential equalization takes place using additional ground disks, which are connected to the ground terminal via a ground cable (copper wire, min. 6 mm² / 0.0093 in
Installation Instructions.
). When installing the ground disks, please comply with the enclosed
Fig. 45:
A0011895
Via the ground terminal of the transmitter
57
Wiring Promag 50
Operating conditions
When using the measuring device in a:
• Pipe with a cathodic protection unit
The device is installed potential-free in the pipe.
Only the two flanges of the pipe are connected with a ground cable (copper wire, 6 mm² / 0.0093 in coating with flange screws.
). Here, the ground cable is mounted directly on the conductive flange
Note the following when installing:
• The applicable regulations regarding potential-free installation must be observed.
• There should be no electrically conductive connection between the pipe and the device.
• The mounting material must withstand the applicable torques.
Potential equalization
2
1
2
1
2
Fig. 46: Potential equalization and cathodic protection
A0011896
Power supply isolation transformer
Electrically isolated
4.4
Degree of protection
The devices meet all the requirements of IP 67 degree of protection.
Compliance with the following points is mandatory following installation in the field or servicing in order to ensure that IP 67 protection is maintained:
• The housing seals must be clean and undamaged when inserted into their grooves. The seals must be dried, cleaned or replaced if necessary.
• All threaded fasteners and screw covers must be firmly tightened.
• The cables used for connection must be of the specified outside diameter → 51.
• Firmly tighten the cable entries.
• The cables must loop down before they enter the cable entries («water trap»). This arrangement prevents moisture penetrating the entry. Always install the measuring device in such a way that the cable entries do not point up.
• Remove all unused cable entries and insert plugs instead.
• Do not remove the grommet from the cable entry.
58 b
Fig. 47:
a
Installation instructions, cable entries
a0001914
«
Caution!
Do not loosen the threaded fasteners of the sensor housing, as otherwise the degree of protection guaranteed by Endress+Hauser no longer applies.
!
Note!
The Promag E/L/P/W sensors can be supplied with IP 68 rating (permanent immersion in water to a depth of 3 meters (10 ft)). In this case the transmitter must be installed remote from the sensor.
The Promag L sensors with IP 68 rating are only available with stainless steel flanges.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Wiring
4.5
Post-connection check
Perform the following checks after completing electrical installation of the measuring device:
Device condition and specifications
Are cables or the device damaged (visual inspection)?
Electrical connection
Does the supply voltage match the specifications on the nameplate?
Do the cables used comply with the necessary specifications?
Do the cables have adequate strain relief?
Is the cable type route completely isolated?
Without loops and crossovers?
Are the power-supply and signal cables correctly connected?
Notes
—
Notes
• 85 to 250 V AC (50 to 60 Hz)
• 20 to 28 V AC (50 to 60 Hz)
11 to 40 V DC
→ 51
—
—
Only remote version:
Is the flow sensor connected to the matching transmitter electronics?
Only remote version:
Is the connecting cable between sensor and transmitter connected correctly?
Are all screw terminals firmly tightened?
Have the measures for grounding/potential equalization been correctly implemented?
Are all cable entries installed, firmly tightened and correctly sealed?
Cables looped as «water traps»?
Are all housing covers installed and firmly tightened?
See the wiring diagram inside the cover of the terminal compartment
Check serial number on nameplates of sensor and connected transmitter.
→ 46
—
→ 55
→ 58
—
Endress+Hauser 59
Operation Promag 50
5 Operation
5.1
Display and operating elements
The local display enables you to read all important parameters directly at the measuring point and configure the device.
The display area consists of two lines; this is where measured values are displayed, and/or status variables (direction of flow, partially filled pipe, bar graph, etc.). You can change the assignment of display lines to variables at will in order to customize the display to suit your needs and preferences ( «Description of Device Functions» manual).
1
+48.25 xx/yy
+3702.6 x
—
Esc
+
E
2 3
A0001141
Fig. 48:
1
Display and operating elements
Liquid crystal display
The two-line liquid-crystal display shows measured values, dialog texts, error messages and information messages. The display as it appears when normal measuring is in progress is known as the HOME position (operating mode).
– Upper display line: Shows primary measured values, e.g. volume flow in [ml/min] or in [%].
– Lower display line: Shows supplementary measured variables and status variables, e.g. totalizer reading in [m3], bar graph, measuring point designation
2 Plus/minus keys
– Enter numerical values, select parameters
– Select different function groups within the function matrix
3
Press the +/- keys simultaneously to trigger the following functions:
– Exit the function matrix step by step
HOME position
– Press and hold down +/- keys for longer than 3 seconds
– Cancel data entry
Return directly to HOME position
Enter key
– HOME position
Entry into the function matrix
– Save the numerical values you input or settings you change
60 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Operation
5.2
Brief operating instructions on the function matrix
!
Note!
• See the general notes on → 62.
• Detailed description of all the functions »Description of Device Functions» manual
The function matrix comprises two levels, namely the function groups and the functions of the function groups.
The groups are the highest-level grouping of the control options for the device. A number of functions is assigned to each group. You select a group in order to access the individual functions for operating and configuring the device.
1. HOME position F Enter the function matrix
2. Select a function group (e.g. OPERATION)
3. Select a function (e.g. LANGUAGE)
Change parameter/enter numerical values:
P
select or enter enable code, parameters, numerical values
F
save your entries
4. Exit the function matrix:
– Press and hold down Esc key (X) for longer than 3 seconds HOME position
– Repeatedly press Esc key (X) return step by step to HOME position
—
Esc
+
E m
E
–
Esc
+ p
–
Esc
+
> 3 s
E
–
Esc
+ o
E E E E n
+
–
E
E
E
E
Fig. 49: Selecting functions and configuring parameters (function matrix)
A0001142
Endress+Hauser 61
Operation Promag 50
5.2.1
General notes
The Quick Setup menu (→ 72) is adequate for commissioning in most instances. Complex
measuring operations on the other hand necessitate additional functions that you can configure as necessary and customize to suit your process parameters. The function matrix, therefore, comprises a multiplicity of additional functions which, for the sake of clarity, are arranged in a number of function groups.
Comply with the following instructions when configuring functions:
• You select functions as described on → 61.
• You can switch off certain functions (OFF). If you do so, related functions in other function groups will no longer be displayed.
• Certain functions prompt you to confirm your data entries.
Press P to select «SURE [ YES ]» and press F again to confirm. This saves your setting or starts a function, as applicable.
• Return to the HOME position is automatic if no key is pressed for 5 minutes.
!
Note!
• The transmitter continues to measure while data entry is in progress, i.e. the current measured values are output via the signal outputs in the normal way.
• If the power supply fails, all preset and configured values remain safely stored in the
EEPROM.
«
Caution!
All functions are described in detail, including the function matrix itself, in the «Description of Device Functions» manual, which is a separate part of these Operating Instructions.
5.2.2
Enabling the programming mode
The function matrix can be disabled. Disabling the function matrix rules out the possibility of inadvertent changes to device functions, numerical values or factory settings. A numerical code (factory setting = 50) has to be entered before settings can be changed.
If you use a code number of your choice, you exclude the possibility of unauthorized persons accessing data ( see the «Description of Device Functions» manual).
Comply with the following instructions when entering codes:
• If programming is disabled and the P operating elements are pressed in any function, a prompt for the code automatically appears on the display.
• If «0» is specified as the customer’s code, programming is always enabled.
• The Endress+Hauser service organization can be of assistance if you mislay your personal code.
«
Caution!
Changing certain parameters such as all sensor characteristics, for example, influences numerous functions of the entire measuring system, particularly measuring accuracy.
There is no need to change these parameters under normal circumstances and consequently, they are protected by a special code known only to the Endress+Hauser service organization.
Please contact Endress+Hauser if you have any questions.
5.2.3
Disabling the programming mode
Programming is disabled if you do not press the operating elements within 60 seconds following automatic return to the HOME position.
You can also disable programming in the «ACCESS CODE» function by entering any number
(other than the customer’s code).
62 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Operation
5.3
Displaying error messages
5.3.1
Type of error
Errors which occur during commissioning or measuring operation are displayed immediately. If two or more system or process errors occur, the error with the highest priority is the one shown on the display.
The measuring system distinguishes between two types of error:
• System errors → 82:
This group comprises all device errors, e.g. communication errors, hardware faults, etc.
• Process errors → 84:
This group comprises all application errors, e.g. empty pipe, etc.
1
P X X X X X X X X X X
# 0 0 0 0 0 : 0 0 : 0 5
2 4 5 3
3
4
5
Fig. 50:
1
2
Error messages on the display (example)
Error type:
– P = process error
– S = system error
Error message type:
–
$
= fault message
– ! = notice message
Error designation: e.g. EMPTY PIPE = measuring tube is only partly filled or completely empty
Error number: e.g. #401
Duration of most recent error occurrence (in hours, minutes and seconds)
A0000991
5.3.2
Error message types
Users have the option of weighting certain errors differently, in other words having them classed as «Fault messages» or «Notice messages». You can define messages in this way with the aid of the function matrix ( «Description of Device Functions» manual).
Serious system errors, e.g. module defects, are always identified and classed as «fault messages» by the measuring device.
Notice message (!)
• Displayed as Exclamation mark (!), error type (S: system error, P: process error)
• The error in question has no effect on the outputs of the measuring device.
Fault message ($)
• Displayed as Lightning flash ( $), error type (S: system error, P: process error).
• The error in question has a direct effect on the outputs.
The response of the individual outputs (failsafe mode) can be defined in the function matrix using the «FAILSAFE MODE» function ( «Description of Device Functions» manual).
!
Note!
For security reasons, error messages should be output via the status output.
Endress+Hauser 63
Operation Promag 50
5.4
Communication
In addition to local operation, the measuring device can be configured and measured values can be obtained by means of the HART protocol. Digital communication takes place using the
4–20 mA current output HART → 54.
The HART protocol allows the transfer of measuring and device data between the HART master and the field devices for configuration and diagnostics purposes.
The HART master, e.g. a handheld terminal or PC-based operating programs (such as
FieldCare), require device description (DD) files which are used to access all the information in a HART device. Information is exclusively transferred using so-called «commands». There are three different command classes:
• Universal commands:
All HART device support and use universal commands.
The following functionalities are linked to them:
– Identify HART devices
– Reading digital measured values (volume flow, totalizer, etc.)
• Common practice commands:
Common practice commands offer functions which are supported and can be executed by most but not all field devices.
• Device-specific commands:
These commands allow access to device-specific functions which are not HART standard.
Such commands access individual field device information, amongst other things, such as empty/full pipe calibration values, low flow cutoff settings, etc.
!
Note!
The device has access to all three command classes. A list of all the «Universal commands»
and «Common practice commands» is provided on → 66.
5.4.1
Operating options
For the complete operation of the measuring device, including device-specific commands, there are DD files available to the user to provide the following operating aids and programs:
Field Xpert HART Communicator
Selecting device functions with a HART Communicator is a process involving a number of menu levels and a special HART function matrix.
The HART manual in the carrying case of the HART Communicator contains more detailed information on the device.
Operating program «FieldCare»
FieldCare is Endress+Hauser’s FDT-based plant Asset Management Tool and allows the configuration and diagnosis of intelligent field devices. By using status information, you also have a simple but effective tool for monitoring devices. The Proline flow measuring devices are accessed via a service interface or via the service interface FXA193.
Operating program «SIMATIC PDM» (Siemens)
SIMATIC PDM is a standardized, manufacturer-independent tool for the operation, configuration, maintenance and diagnosis of intelligent field devices.
Operating program «AMS» (Emerson Process Management)
AMS (Asset Management Solutions): program for operating and configuring devices.
64 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Endress+Hauser
Operation
5.4.2
Current device description files
The following table illustrates the suitable device description file for the operating tool in question and then indicates where these can be obtained.
HART protocol:
Valid for device software: 2.04.XX
Function DEVICE SOFTWARE
Device data HART
Manufacturer ID:
Device ID:
HART version data:
Software release:
Operating program:
Handheld Field Xpert SFX100
FieldCare / DTM
AMS
SIMATIC PDM
11 hex
(ENDRESS+HAUSER)
41 hex
Device Revision 6/ DD Revision 1
Function MANUFACTURER ID
Function DEVICE ID
01.2011
Sources for obtaining device descriptions:
Use update function of handheld terminal
• www.endress.com Download
• CD-ROM (Endress+Hauser order number 56004088)
• DVD (Endress+Hauser order number 70100690) www.endress.com Download www.endress.com Download
Tester/simulator:
Fieldcheck
Sources for obtaining device descriptions:
Update by means of FieldCare with the flow device FXA193/291 DTM in the Fieldflash module
!
Note!
The «Fieldcheck» tester/simulator is used for testing flowmeters in the field. When used in conjunction with the «FieldCare» software package, test results can be imported into a database, printed out and used for official certification. Contact your Endress+Hauser representative for more information.
5.4.3
Device variables
The following device variables are available using the HART protocol:
Code (decimal)
0
1
250
251
Device variable
OFF (not assigned)
Volume flow
Totalizer 1
Totalizer 2
At the factory, the process variables are assigned to the following device variables:
• Primary process variable (PV) Volume flow
• Second process variable (SV) Totalizer 1
• Third process variable (TV) not assigned
• Fourth process variable (FV) not assigned
!
Note!
You can set or change the assignment of device variables to process variables using
Command 51.
5.4.4
Switching HART write protection on/off
The HART write protection can be switched on and off using the HART WRITE PROTECT device function (»Description of Device Functions» manual).
65
Operation Promag 50
5.4.5
Universal and common practice HART commands
The following table contains all the universal commands supported by the device.
Command No.
HART command / Access type
Universal commands
0 Read unique device identifier
Access type = read
1
2
3
6
Read primary process variable
Access type = read
Read the primary process variable as current in mA and percentage of the set measuring range
Access type = read none
Read the primary process variable as current in mA and four dynamic process variables
Access type = read none
Set HART shortform address
Access type = write
Command data
(numeric data in decimal form) none none
Response data
(numeric data in decimal form)
Device identification delivers information on the device and the manufacturer. It cannot be changed.
The response consists of a 12 byte device ID:
– Byte 0: fixed value 254
– Byte 1: Manufacturer ID, 17 = E+H
– Byte 2: Device type ID, 65 = Promag 50
– Byte 3: Number of preambles
– Byte 4: Universal commands rev. no.
– Byte 5: Device-specific commands rev. no.
– Byte 6: Software revision
– Byte 7: Hardware revision
– Byte 8: Additional device information
– Bytes 9-11: Device identification
– Byte 0: HART unit code of the primary process variable
– Bytes 1-4: Primary process variable
Factory setting:
Primary process variable = Volume flow
!
Note!
• Manufacturer-specific units are represented using the
HART unit code «240».
• You can change the assignment of device variables to process variables using Command 51.
– Bytes 0-3: actual current of the primary process variable in mA
– Bytes 4-7: % value of the set measuring range
Factory setting:
Primary process variable = Volume flow
!
Note!
You can change the assignment of device variables to process variables using Command 51.
24 bytes are sent as a response:
– Bytes 0-3: primary process variable current in mA
– Byte 4: HART unit code of the primary process variable
– Bytes 5-8: Primary process variable
– Byte 9: HART unit code of the second process variable
– Bytes 10-13: Second process variable
– Byte 14: HART unit code of the third process variable
– Bytes 15-18: Third process variable
– Byte 19: HART unit code of the fourth process variable
– Bytes 20-23: Fourth process variable
Factory setting:
• Primary process variable = Volume flow
• Second process variable = Totalizer 1
• Third process variable = OFF (not assigned)
• Fourth process variable = OFF (not assigned)
Byte 0: desired address (0 to 15)
Factory setting: 0
!
Note!
With an address >0 (multidrop mode), the current output of the primary process variable is set to 4 mA.
!
Note!
• Manufacturer-specific units are represented using the
HART unit code «240».
• You can change the assignment of device variables to process variables using Command 51.
Byte 0: active address
66 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Operation
Command No.
HART command / Access type
11 Read unique device identification using the TAG
(measuring point designation)
Access type = read
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Read user message
Access type = read
Read TAG, descriptor and date
Access type = read
Read sensor information on primary process variable
Read output information of primary process variable
Access type = read
Command data
(numeric data in decimal form)
Bytes 0-5: TAG none none none none
Response data
(numeric data in decimal form)
Device identification delivers information on the device and the manufacturer. It cannot be changed.
The response consists of a 12 byte device ID if the given
TAG agrees with the one saved in the device:
– Byte 0: fixed value 254
– Byte 1: Manufacturer ID, 17 = E+H
– Byte 2: Device type ID, 65 = Promag 50
– Byte 3: Number of preambles
– Byte 4: Universal commands rev. no.
– Byte 5: Device-specific commands rev. no.
– Byte 6: Software revision
– Byte 7: Hardware revision
– Byte 8: Additional device information
– Bytes 9-11: Device identification
Bytes 0-24: User message
!
Note!
You can write the user message using Command 17.
– Bytes 0-5: TAG
– Bytes 6-17: descriptor
– Bytes 18-20: Date
!
Note!
You can write the TAG, descriptor and date using
Command 18.
– Bytes 0-2: Sensor serial number
– Byte 3: HART unit code of sensor limits and measuring range of the primary process variable
– Bytes 4-7: Upper sensor limit
– Bytes 8-11: Lower sensor limit
– Bytes 12-15: Minimum span
!
Note!
• The data relate to the primary process variable
(= volume flow).
• Manufacturer-specific units are represented using the
HART unit code «240».
– Byte 0: Alarm selection ID
– Byte 1: Transfer function ID
– Byte 2: HART unit code for the set measuring range of the primary process variable
– Bytes 3-6: upper range, value for 20 mA
– Bytes 7-10: lower range, value for 4 mA
– Bytes 11-14: Damping constant in [s]
– Byte 15: Write protection ID
– Byte 16: OEM dealer ID, 17 = E+H
Factory setting: Primary process variable = Volume flow
!
Note!
• Manufacturer-specific units are represented using the
HART unit code «240».
• You can change the assignment of device variables to process variables using Command 51.
Bytes 0-2: Production number Read the device production number
Access type = read
Write user message
Access = write
Write TAG, descriptor and date
Access = write
Write the device production number
Access = write none
You can save any 32-character long text in the device under this parameter:
Bytes 0-23: Desired user message
With this parameter, you can store an 8 character
TAG, a 16 character descriptor and a date:
– Bytes 0-5: TAG
– Bytes 6-17: descriptor
– Bytes 18-20: Date
Bytes 0-2: Production number
Displays the current user message in the device:
Bytes 0-23: Current user message in the device
Displays the current information in the device:
– Bytes 0-5: TAG
– Bytes 6-17: descriptor
– Bytes 18-20: Date
Bytes 0-2: Production number
Endress+Hauser 67
Operation Promag 50
The following table contains all the common practice commands supported by the device.
Command No.
HART command / Access type
Common practice commands
34 Write damping value for primary process variable
Access = write
35
38
40
42
44
Write measuring range of primary process variable
Access = write
Device status reset
(configuration changed)
Access = write
Simulate input current of primary process variable
Access = write
Perform master reset
Access = write
Write unit of primary process variable
Access = write
Command data
(numeric data in decimal form)
Response data
(numeric data in decimal form)
Bytes 0-3: Damping value of the primary process variable «volume flow» in seconds
Factory setting:
Primary process variable = Current output damping
Write the desired measuring range:
– Byte 0: HART unit code of the primary process variable
– Bytes 1-4: upper range, value for 20 mA
– Bytes 5-8: lower range, value for 4 mA
Factory setting:
Primary process variable = Volume flow
!
Note!
• The start of the measuring range (4 mA) must correspond to the zero flow.
• If the HART unit code is not the correct one for the process variable, the device will continue with the last valid unit.
none
Displays the current damping value in the device:
Bytes 0-3: Damping value in seconds
The currently set measuring range is displayed as a response:
– Byte 0: HART unit code for the set measuring range of the primary process variable
– Bytes 1-4: upper range, value for 20 mA
– Bytes 5-8: lower range, value for 4 mA
!
Note!
• Manufacturer-specific units are represented using the
HART unit code «240».
• You can change the assignment of device variables to process variables using Command 51.
Simulation of the desired output current of the primary process variable. An entry value of 0 exits the simulation mode:
Bytes 0-3: Output current in mA
Factory setting:
Primary process variable = Volume flow
!
Note!
You can set the assignment of device variables to process variables using Command 51.
none none
!
Note!
It is also possible to execute this HART command when write protection is activated (= ON)!
The momentary output current of the primary process variable is displayed as a response:
Bytes 0-3: Output current in mA none
48 Read additional device status
Access = read
Set unit of primary process variable. Only units which are suitable for the process variable are transferred to the device:
Byte 0: HART unit code
Factory setting:
Primary process variable = Volume flow
!
Note!
• If the written HART unit code is not the correct one for the process variable, the device will continue with the last valid unit.
• If you change the unit of the primary process variable, this has a direct impact on the system units.
none
The current unit code of the primary process variable is displayed as a response: Byte 0: HART unit code
!
Note!
Manufacturer-specific units are represented using the
HART unit code «240».
The device status is displayed in extended form as the
response: Coding: see table → 70
68 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Operation
Command No.
HART command / Access type
50
51
53
Read assignment of the device variables to the four process variables
Access = read
Command data
(numeric data in decimal form) none
Write assignment of the device variables to the four process variables
Access = write
Setting of the device variables to the four process variables:
– Byte 0: Device variable code to the primary process variable
– Byte 1: Device variable code to the second process variable
– Byte 2: Device variable code to the third process variable
– Byte 3: Device variable code to the fourth process variable
Factory setting:
• Primary process variable: Volume flow
• Second process variable: Totalizer 1
• Third process variable: OFF (not assigned)
• Fourth process variable: OFF (not assigned)
Write device variable unit
Access = write
Response data
(numeric data in decimal form)
Display of the current variable assignment of the process variables:
– Byte 0: Device variable code to the primary process variable
– Byte 1: Device variable code to the second process variable
– Byte 2: Device variable code to the third process variable
– Byte 3: Device variable code to the fourth process variable
Factory setting:
• Primary process variable: Code 1 for volume flow
• Second process variable: Code 250 for totalizer
• Third process variable: Code 0 for OFF (not assigned)
• Fourth process variable: Code 0 for OFF (not assigned)
The variable assignment of the process variables is displayed as a response:
– Byte 0: Device variable code to the primary process variable
– Byte 1: Device variable code to the second process variable
– Byte 2: Device variable code to the third process variable
– Byte 3: Device variable code to the fourth process variable
This command sets the unit of the given device variables. Only those units which suit the device variable are transferred:
– Byte 0: Device variable code
– Byte 1: HART unit code
Code of the supported device variables: See
information → 65
!
Note!
• If the written unit is not the correct one for the device variable, the device will continue with the last valid unit.
• If you change the unit of the device variable, this has a direct impact on the system units.
The current unit of the device variables is displayed in the device as a response:
– Byte 0: Device variable code
– Byte 1: HART unit code
!
Note!
Manufacturer-specific units are represented using the
HART unit code «240».
59 Write number of preambles in response message
Access = write
This parameter sets the number of preambles which are inserted in the response messages:
Byte 0: Number of preambles (4 to 20)
The current number of preambles is displayed in the response telegram: Byte 0: Number of preambles
Endress+Hauser 69
Operation
70
Promag 50
5.4.6
Device status and error messages
You can read the extended device status, in this case, current error messages, via Command
«48». The command delivers information which is partly coded in bits (see table below).
!
Note!
• You can find a detailed explanation of the device status and error messages and their
elimination on → 70
• Bits and bytes not listed are not assigned.
6
1
2
7
0
5
6
3
4
Byte Bit
0
0 1
2
1
3
5
3
1
2
4
4
0
4
3
5
1
2
7
0
7
8 1
2
7
0
5
6
3
4
355
356
357
358
351
352
353
354
347
348
349
350
343
344
345
346
339
340
341
342
121
251
261
321
Error No. Short error description
001 Serious device error
011
012
Measuring amplifier has faulty EEPROM
Error when accessing data of the measuring amplifier EEPROM
031
032
051
111
S-DAT: defective or missing
S-DAT: Error accessing saved values
I/O and the amplifier are not compatible.
Totalizer checksum error
I/O board and amplifier not compatible.
Internal communication fault on the amplifier board.
No data reception between amplifier and I/O board
Coil current of the sensor is outside the tolerance.
Flow buffer:
The temporarily buffered flow portions (measuring mode for pulsating flow) could not be cleared or output within 60 seconds.
Frequency buffer:
The temporarily buffered flow portions (measuring mode for pulsating flow) could not be cleared or output within 60 seconds.
Pulse buffer:
The temporarily buffered flow portions (measuring mode for pulsating flow) could not be cleared or output within 60 seconds.
Current output:
Flow is out of range.
Frequency output:
Flow is out of range.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Operation
Byte Bit
3
4
8
5
6
10 7
2
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
4
1
2
7
0
5
6
3
4
1
2
7
0
0
3
1
7
1
2
7
0
3
4
5
6
3
4
671
672
673
674
641
642
643
644
691
692
631
632
633
634
621
622
623
624
611
612
613
614
474
501
502
601
Error No. Short error description
359
360
Pulse output:
Flow is out of range.
361
362
401
461
Measuring tube partially filled or empty
EPD calibration not possible because the fluid’s conductivity is either too low or too high.
463
The EPD calibration values for empty pipe and full pipe are identical, and therefore incorrect.
Maximum flow value entered is overshot
Amplifier software version is loaded. Currently no other commands are possible.
Upload/download of device files. Currently no other commands are possible.
Positive zero return active
Simulation current output active
Simulation frequency output active
Simulation pulse output active
Simulation status output active
Simulation of the status input active
Simulation of response to error (outputs) active
Simulation of volume flow active
Endress+Hauser 71
Commissioning Promag 50
6 Commissioning
6.1
Function check
Make sure that all final checks have been completed before you start up your measuring point:
• Checklist for «Post-installation check» → 45
• Checklist for «Post-connection check» → 59
6.2
Switching on the measuring device
Once the connection checks have been successfully completed, it is time to switch on the power supply. The device is now operational. The measuring device performs a number of post switch-on self-tests. As this procedure progresses the following sequence of messages appears on the local display:
PROMAG 50
STARTUP. . .
▾
DEVICE SOFTWARE
V XX.XX.XX
▾
SYSTEM OK
OPERATION
▾
Start-up message
Current software version
Beginning of normal measuring mode
Normal measuring mode commences as soon as start-up completes.
Various measured-value and/or status variables (HOME position) appear on the display.
!
Note!
If start-up fails, an error message indicating the cause is displayed.
72 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Endress+Hauser
Commissioning
6.3
Quick Setup
In the case of measuring devices without a local display, the individual parameters and functions must be configured via the operating program, e.g. FieldCare.
If the measuring device is equipped with a local display, all the important device parameters for standard operation, as well as additional functions, can be configured quickly and easily by means of the following Quick Setup menu.
6.3.1
«Commissioning» Quick Setup menu
This Quick Setup menu guides you systematically through the setup procedure for all the major device functions that have to be configured for standard measuring operation.
XXX.XXX.XX
—
Esc
+
E
HOME-POSITION
E
+
+
Assign
Current
Current
Span
Value
20 mA
Time
Constant
Failsafe
Mode
Quick Setup
Current Output
QS
Commission
Language
Frequency
Assign
Frequency
End Value
Freq.
Value f max
Output
Signal
Time
Constant
Failsafe
Mode
Defaults
Unit
Volume flow
Measuring
Mode
Freq.-/ Pulse Output
Operation
Mode
Pulse
Assign
Pulse
Pulse
Value
Pulse
Width
Output
Signal
Failsafe
Mode
Quit
Automatic parameterization of the display
Quit Quick Setup
Fig. 51: «QUICK SETUP COMMISSIONING» menu for the rapid configuration of important device functions
A0005413-EN
73
Commissioning Promag 50
6.4
Configuration
6.4.1
Current output: active/passive
#
The current output is configured as «active» or «passive» by means of various jumpers on the I/
O board.
Warning!
Risk of electric shock! Exposed components carry dangerous voltages. Make sure that the power supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics compartment.
1. Switch off power supply.
2. Remove the I/O board → 89
3. Position the jumper → 52
«
Caution!
Risk of destroying the measuring device. Set the jumpers exactly as shown in the graphic. Pay strict attention to the position of the jumpers as indicated in the graphic.
4. Installation of the I/O board is the reverse of the removal procedure.
1
2
A0001044
Fig. 52:
1
2
Configuring current outputs using jumpers (I/O board)
Active current output (factory setting)
Passive current output
74 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Endress+Hauser
Commissioning
6.5
Adjustment
6.5.1
Empty-pipe/full-pipe adjustment
Flow cannot be measured correctly unless the measuring tube is completely full.
This status can be permanently monitored using the Empty Pipe Detection:
• EPD = Empty Pipe Detection (with the help of an EPD electrode)
• OED = Open Electrode Detection (Empty Pipe Detection with the help of the measuring electrodes, if the sensor is not equipped with an EPD electrode or the orientation is not suitable for using EPD).
«
Caution!
Detailed information on the empty-pipe/full-pipe adjustment procedure can be found in the
«Description of Device Functions» manual:
• EPD/OED ADJUSTMENT (carrying out the adjustment).
• EPD (switching on and off EPD/OED).
• EPD RESPONSE TIME (input of the response time for EPD/OED).
!
Note!
• The EPD function is not available unless the sensor is fitted with an EPD electrode.
• The devices are already calibrated at the factory with water (approx. 500 μS/cm).
If the fluid conductivity differs from this reference, empty-pipe/full-pipe adjustment has to be performed again on site.
• The default setting for EPD when the devices are delivered is OFF; the function has to be activated if required.
• The EPD process error can be output by means of the configurable relay output.
Performing empty-pipe and full-pipe adjustment (EPD)
1. Select the appropriate function in the function matrix:
HOME → → → PROCESS PARAMETER → → → EPD ADJUSTMENT
2. Empty the piping:
– The wall of the measuring tube should still be wet with fluid during EPD empty pipe adjustment
– The wall of the measuring tube/the measuring electrodes should no longer be wet with fluid during OED empty pipe adjustment
3. Start empty-pipe adjustment: Select «EMPTY PIPE ADJUST» or «OED EMPTY ADJUST» and press to confirm.
4. After empty-pipe adjustment, fill the piping with fluid.
5. Start full-pipe adjustment: Select «FULL PIPE ADJUST» or «OED FULL ADJUST» and press
to confirm.
6. Having completed the adjustment, select the setting «OFF» and exit the function by pressing .
7. Switch on empty pipe detection in the EPD function:
– EPD empty pipe adjustment: Select ON STANDARD or ON SPECIAL and press to confirm
– OED empty pipe adjustment: Select OED and confirm with .
«
Caution!
The adjustment coefficients must be valid before you can activate the EPD function. If adjustment is incorrect the following messages might appear on the display:
– FULL = EMPTY
The adjustment values for empty pipe and full pipe are identical. In cases of this nature you must repeat empty-pipe or full-pipe adjustment!
– ADJUSTMENT NOT OK
Adjustment is not possible because the fluid’s conductivity is out of range.
75
Commissioning Promag 50
6.6
Data storage device (HistoROM)
At Endress+Hauser, the term HistoROM refers to various types of data storage modules on which process and measuring device data are stored. It is possible to plug these modules into other devices to copy device configurations from one device to another, for example.
6.6.1
HistoROM/S-DAT (sensor-DAT)
The S-DAT is an exchangeable data storage device in which all sensor relevant parameters are stored, i.e., diameter, serial number, calibration factor, zero point.
76 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Maintenance
7 Maintenance
No special maintenance work is required.
7.1
Exterior cleaning
When cleaning the exterior of measuring devices, always use cleaning agents that do not attack the surface of the housing and the seals.
7.2
Seals
The seals of the Promag H sensor must be replaced periodically, particularly in the case of gasket seals (aseptic version).
The period between changes depends on the frequency of cleaning cycles, the cleaning temperature and the fluid temperature.
Replacement seals (accessories) → 78.
Endress+Hauser 77
Accessories
78
Promag 50
8 Accessories
Various accessories, which can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser, are available for the transmitter and the sensor. Your Endress+Hauser service organization can provide detailed information on the specific order codes on request.
8.1
Device-specific accessories
Accessory
Proline Promag 50 transmitter
Description
Transmitter for replacement or storage. Use the order code to define the following specifications:
• Approvals
• Degree of protection/version
• Cable for remote version
• Cable entry
• Display/power supply/operation
• Software
• Outputs/inputs
Order code
50XXX – XXXXX******
8.2
Measuring principle-specific accessories
Accessory
Mounting set for
Promag 50 transmitter
Description Order code
Mounting set for the transmitter (remote version). Suitable for:
• Wall mounting
• Pipe mounting
• Panel-mounted installation
DK5WM – *
Mounting set for aluminum field housing. Suitable for:
• Pipe mounting
Wall-mounting kit for the Promag H sensor.
Wall-mounting kit for
Promag H
Cable for remote version Coil and signal cables, various lengths.
Mounting kit for
Promag D, wafer version
• Mounting bolts
• Nuts incl. washers
• Flange seals
• Centering sleeves (if required for the flange)
Set of seals consisting of two flange seals.
Set of seals for
Promag D
Mounting kit for
Promag H
• 2 process connections
• Threaded fasteners
• Seals
DK5HM – **
DK5CA – **
DKD** – **
DK5DD – ***
DKH** – ****
Set of seals for
Promag H
Welding jig for
Promag H
Adapter connection for
Promag A, H
Ground rings for
Promag H
For regular replacement of the seals of the Promag H sensor. DK5HS – ***
Weld nipple as process connection: welding jig for installation in pipe.
Adapter connections for installing a Promag 10 H instead of a
Promag 30/33 A or Promag 30/33 H DN 25.
Ground rings for potential equalization.
DK5HW – ***
DK5HA – *****
DK5HR – ***
Ground cable for potential equalization.
DK5GC – *** Ground cable for
Promag E/L/P/W
Ground disk for
Promag E/L/P/W
Ground disk for potential equalization.
DK5GD – * * ***
Process display
RIA45
Multifunctional 1-channel display unit:
• Universal input
• Transmitter power supply
• Limit relay
• Analog output
RIA45 – ******
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Accessories
Accessory
Process display
RIA251
Field display unit
RIA16
Application Manager
RMM621
Description
Digital display device for looping into the 4 to 20 mA current loop.
Order code
RIA251 – **
Digital field display device for looping into the 4 to 20 mA current loop.
RIA16 – ***
Electronic recording, display, balancing, control, saving and event and alarm monitoring of analog and digital input signals.
Values and conditions determined are output by means of analog and digital output signals. Remote transmission of alarms, input values and calculated values using a PSTN or
GSM modem.
RMM621 – **********
8.3
Communication-specific accessories
Accessory
HART Communicator
Field Xpert SFX 100
Fieldgate FXA320
Fieldgate FXA520
FXA195
Description Order code
Handheld terminal for remote configuration and for obtaining measured values via the HART current output (4 to 20 mA) and FOUNDATION Fieldbus.
Contact your Endress+Hauser representative for more information.
SFX100 – *******
FXA320 – ***** Gateway for remote interrogation of HART sensors and actuators via Web browser:
• 2-channel analog input (4 to 20 mA)
• 4 binary inputs with event counter function and frequency measurement
• Communication via modem, Ethernet or GSM
• Visualization via Internet/Intranet in Web browser and/or
WAP cellular phone
• Limit value monitoring with alarm by e-mail or SMS
• Synchronized time stamping of all measured values.
Gateway for remote interrogation of HART sensors and actuators via Web browser:
• Web server for remote monitoring of up to 30 measuring points
• Intrinsically safe version [EEx ia]IIC for applications in hazardous areas
• Communication via modem, Ethernet or GSM
• Visualization via Internet/Intranet in Web browser and/or
WAP cellular phone
• Limit value monitoring with alarm by e-mail or SMS
• Synchronized time stamping of all measured values
• Remote diagnosis and remote configuration of connected
HART devices
FXA520 – ****
The Commubox FXA195 connects intrinsically safe Smart transmitters with HART protocol to the USB port of a personal computer. This makes the remote operation of the transmitters possible with the aid of configuration programs (e.g.
FieldCare).
Power is supplied to the Commubox by means of the USB port
FXA195 – *
Endress+Hauser 79
Accessories Promag 50
8.4
Service-specific accessories
Accessory
Applicator
Fieldcheck
FieldCare
Memograph M graphic display recorder
FXA193
Description
Software for selecting and planning flowmeters. The
Applicator software can be downloaded from the Internet or ordered on CD-ROM for installation on a local PC.
Contact your Endress+Hauser representative for more information.
Order code
DXA80 – *
Tester/simulator for testing flowmeters in the field. When used in conjunction with the «FieldCare» software package, test results can be imported into a database, printed out and used for official certification.
Contact your Endress+Hauser representative for more information.
50098801
FieldCare is Endress+Hauser’s FDT-based asset management tool. It can configure all intelligent field units in your system and helps you manage them. By using status information, it is also a simple but effective way of checking their status and condition.
See the product page on the Endress+Hauser
Web site: www.endress.com
The Memograph M graphic display recorder provides information on all the relevant process variables. Measured values are recorded correctly, limit values are monitored and measuring points analyzed. The data are stored in the 256 MB internal memory and also on a DSD card or USB stick.
Memograph M boasts a modular design, intuitive operation and a comprehensive security concept. The ReadWin
®
2000 PC software is part of the standard package and is used for configuring, visualizing and archiving the data captured.
The mathematics channels which are optionally available enable continuous monitoring of specific power consumption, boiler efficiency and other parameters which are important for efficient energy management.
RSG40 – ************
Service interface from the device to the PC for operation via
FieldCare.
FXA193 – *
80 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Troubleshooting
9 Troubleshooting
9.1
Troubleshooting instructions
Always start troubleshooting with the checklist below if faults occur after start-up or during operation. The routine takes you directly to the cause of the problem and the appropriate remedial measures.
Check the display
No display visible and no output signals present.
1. Check the supply voltage terminals 1, 2
2. Check the power line fuse → 93
85 to 260 V AC: 0.8 A slow-blow / 250 V
20 to 55 V AC / 16 to 62 V DC: 2 A slow-blow / 250 V
3. Measuring electronics defective order spare parts → 88
No display visible, but output signals are present.
1. Check whether the ribbon-cable connector of the display module is correctly
plugged into the amplifier board → 89
2. Display module defective order spare parts → 88
3. Measuring electronics defective order spare parts → 88
Display texts are in a foreign language.
Switch off power supply. Press and hold down both the OS buttons and switch on the measuring device. The display text will appear in English (default) and is displayed at maximum contrast.
Measured value indicated, but no signal at the current or pulse output.
Electronics board defective order spare parts → 88
Error messages on display
Errors which occur during commissioning or measuring operation are displayed immediately.
Error messages consist of a variety of icons: the meanings of these icons are as follows (example):
– Error type: S = system error, P = process error
– Error message type: $ = fault message, ! = notice message
– EMPTY PIPE = Type of error, e.g. measuring tube is only partly filled or completely empty
– 03:00:05 = duration of error occurrence (in hours, minutes and seconds)
– #401 = error number
«
Caution!
• See the information on → 63!
• The measuring system interprets simulations and positive zero return as system errors, but displays them as notice message only.
Error number:
No. 001 – 399
No. 501 – 699
Error number:
No. 401 — 499
System error (device error) has occurred → 82
Process error (application error) has occurred → 84
Other error (without error message)
Some other error has occurred.
Diagnosis and rectification → 85
Endress+Hauser 81
Troubleshooting Promag 50
9.2
System error messages
Serious system errors are always recognized by the device as «Fault message», and are shown as a lightning flash ($) on the display. Fault messages immediately affect the outputs.
«
Caution!
In the event of a serious fault, a flowmeter might have to be returned to the manufacturer
for repair. The necessary procedures on → 5 must be carried out before you return a
flowmeter to Endress+Hauser. Always enclose a duly completed «Declaration of
Contamination» form. You will find a master copy of this form at the back of this manual.
!
Note!
Also observe the information on → 63.
No. Error message / Type Cause
S = System error
$
= Fault message (with an effect on the outputs)
! = Notice message (without an effect on the outputs)
No. # 0xx Hardware error
001 S: CRITICAL FAILURE
$: # 001
011 S: AMP HW EEPROM
$: # 011
012 S: AMP SW EEPROM
$: # 012
Serious device error
Amplifier:
Defective EEPROM
Amplifier:
Error accessing EEPROM data
031 S: SENSOR HW DAT
$: # 031
032 S: SENSOR SW DAT
$: # 032
Remedy (spare part → 88)
Replace the amplifier board.
Replace the amplifier board.
1. S-DAT is not plugged into the amplifier board correctly (or is missing).
2. S-DAT is defective.
The EEPROM data blocks in which an error has occurred are displayed in the TROUBLESHOOTING function.
Press Enter to acknowledge the errors in question; default values are automatically inserted instead of the errored parameter values.
!
Note!
The measuring device has to be restarted if an error has occurred in a totalizer block (see error No. 111 / CHECKSUM
TOTAL).
1. Check whether the S-DAT is correctly plugged into the amplifier board.
2. Replace the S-DAT if it is defective.
Check that the new replacement DAT is compatible with the measuring electronics.
Check the:
— Spare part set number
— Hardware revision code
3. Replace measuring electronics boards if necessary.
4. Plug the S-DAT into the amplifier board.
No. # 1xx Software error
101 S: GAIN ERROR AMP
$: # 101
Gain deviation compared to reference gain > 25%.
Replace the amplifier board.
111 S: CHECKSUM TOTAL
$: # 111
121 S: A / C COMPATIB.
!: # 121
Totalizer checksum error.
Due to different software versions, I/O board and amplifier board are only partially compatible
(possibly restricted functionality).
!
Note!
– This message is only listed in the error history.
– Nothing is shown on the display.
1. Restart the measuring device.
2. Replace the amplifier board if necessary.
Module with lower software version has either to be updated by FieldCare with the required software version or the module has to be replaced.
82 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Troubleshooting
339
to
342
343
to
346
351
to
354
355
to
358
359
to
362
No. Error message / Type Cause Remedy (spare part → 88)
No. # 2xx Error in DAT / no communication
251 S: COMMUNICATION I/O
$: # 251
Internal communication fault on the amplifier board. Replace the amplifier board.
Check the BUS contacts.
261 S: COMMUNICATION I/O
$: # 261
No data reception between amplifier and I/O board or faulty internal data transfer.
No. # 3xx System limits exceeded
321 S: TOL. COIL CURR.
$: # 321
Sensor:
Coil current is out of tolerance.
#
Warning!
Switch off power supply before manipulating the coil current cable, coil current cable connector or measuring electronics boards!
347
to
350
S: STACK CUR OUT n
!: # 339 to 342
S: STACK FREQ. OUT n
!: # 343 to 346
S: STACK PULSE OUT n
!: # 343 to 346
S: CURRENT RANGE n
!: # 351 to 354
The temporarily buffered flow portions (measuring mode for pulsating flow) could not be cleared or output within 60 seconds.
The temporarily buffered flow portions (measuring mode for pulsating flow) could not be cleared or output within 60 seconds.
Current output: flow is out of range.
Remote version:
1. Check wiring of terminals 41/42 → 46
2. Check coil current cable connector.
Compact and remote version:
Replace measuring electronics boards if necessary
1. Change the upper or lower limit setting, as applicable.
2. Increase or reduce flow, as applicable.
Recommendations in the event of fault category = FAULT
MESSAGE ($)
• Configure the fault response of the output to «ACTUAL
VALUE» so that the temporary buffer can be cleared.
• Clear the temporary buffer by the measures described under
Item 1.
1. Increase the setting for pulse weighting
2. Increase the max. pulse frequency if the totalizer can handle a higher number of pulses.
3. Increase or reduce flow, as applicable.
Recommendations in the event of fault category = FAULT
MESSAGE ($)
• Configure the fault response of the output to «ACTUAL
VALUE» so that the temporary buffer can be cleared.
• Clear the temporary buffer by the measures described under
Item 1.
1. Change the upper or lower limit setting, as applicable.
2. Increase or reduce flow, as applicable.
S: FREQ. RANGE n
!: # 355 to 358
S: PULSE RANGE
!: # 359 to 362
Frequency output: flow is out of range.
Pulse output: the pulse output frequency is out of range.
1. Change the upper or lower limit setting, as applicable.
2. Increase or reduce flow, as applicable.
1. Increase the setting for pulse weighting
2. When selecting the pulse width, choose a value that can still be processed by a connected counter (e.g. mechanical counter, PLC etc.).
Determine the pulse width:
– Variant 1: Enter the minimum duration that a pulse must be present at the connected counter to ensure its registration.
– Variant 2: Enter the maximum (pulse) frequency as the half «reciprocal value» that a pulse must be present at the connected counter to ensure its registration.
Example:
The maximum input frequency of the connected counter is 10 Hz. The pulse width to be entered is:
1
2.10 Hz
= 50 ms
3. Reduce flow.
a0004437
Endress+Hauser 83
Troubleshooting Promag 50
No. Error message / Type
No. # 5xx Application error
501 S: SW.-UPDATE ACT.
!: # 501
502 S: UP-/DOWNLOAD ACT
!: # 502
Cause
New amplifier or communication (I/O module) software version is loaded.
Currently no other functions are possible.
Uploading or downloading the device data via operating program.
Currently no other functions are possible.
Remedy (spare part → 88)
Wait until the procedure is finished.
The device will restart automatically.
Wait until the procedure is finished.
No. # 6xx Simulation mode active
601 S: POS. ZERO-RETURN
!: # 601
Positive zero return active
«
Caution!
This message has the highest display priority!
Simulation current output active
631
to
634
641
to
644
611
to
614
621
to
624
S: SIM. CURR. OUT. n
!: # 611 to 614
S: SIM. FREQ. OUT. n
!: # 621 to 624
S: SIM. PULSE n
!: # 631 to 634
S: SIM. STAT. OUT n
!: # 641 to 644
671
to
674
S: SIM. STATUS IN n
!: # 671 to 674
691 S: SIM. FAILSAFE
!: # 691
692 S: SIM. MEASURAND
!: # 692
698 S: DEV. TEST ACT.
!: # 698
Simulation frequency output active
Simulation pulse output active
Simulation status output active
Simulation status input active
Simulation of response to error (outputs) active
Switch off positive zero return
Switch off simulation
Switch off simulation
Switch off simulation
Switch off simulation
Switch off simulation
Simulation of a measured variable active (e.g. mass flow).
Switch off simulation
The measuring device is being checked on site via the test and simulation device.
–
9.3
Process error messages
!
Note!
Also observe the information on → 63.
No. Error message / Type
401 EMPTY PIPE
$: # 401
Cause
P = Process error
$ = Fault message (with an effect on the outputs)
! = Notice message (without an effect on the outputs)
Measuring tube partially filled or empty
461 ADJ. NOT OK
!: # 461
EPD calibration not possible because the fluid’s conductivity is either too low or too high.
463 FULL = EMPTY
$: # 463
The EPD calibration values for empty pipe and full pipe are identical, therefore incorrect.
Remedy (spare part → 88)
1. Check the process conditions of the plant
2. Fill the measuring tube
The EPD function cannot be used with fluids of this nature.
Repeat calibration, making sure procedure is correct → 75.
84 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Troubleshooting
9.4
Process errors without messages
Symptoms Rectification
Remark: You may have to change or correct certain settings in functions in the function matrix in order to rectify the fault.
Flow values are negative, even though the fluid is flowing forwards through the pipe.
1. Remote version:
– Switch off the power supply and check the wiring → 46
– If necessary, reverse the connections at terminals 41 and 42
Measured-value reading fluctuates even though flow is steady.
2. Change the setting in the «INSTALLATION DIRECTION SENSOR» function accordingly
1. Check grounding and potential equalization → 55
2. Check the fluid for presence of gas bubbles.
3. In the «SYSTEM DAMPING» function increase the value
Measured-value reading shown on display, even though the fluid is at a standstill and the measuring tube is full.
Measured-value reading on display, even though measuring tube is empty.
1. Check grounding and potential equalization → 55
2. Check the fluid for presence of gas bubbles.
3. Activate the «LOW FLOW CUTOFF» function, i.e. enter or increase the value for the switching point.
1. Perform empty-pipe/full-pipe adjustment and then switch on Empty Pipe detection → 75
2. Remote version: Check the terminals of the EPD cable → 46
The current output signal is always 4 mA, irrespective of the flow signal at any given time.
3. Fill the measuring tube.
1. Select the «BUS ADDRESS» function and change the setting to «0».
2. Value for creepage too high. Reduce the value in the «LOW FLOW CUTOFF» function.
The fault cannot be rectified or some other fault not described above has arisen.
In these instances, please contact your Endress+Hauser service organization.
The following options are available for tackling problems of this nature:
Request the services of an Endress+Hauser service technician
If you contact our service organization to have a service technician sent out, please be ready to quote the following information:
– Brief description of the fault
– Nameplate specifications (→ 6): order code, serial number
Returning devices to Endress+Hauser
The necessary procedures (→ 5) must be carried out before you return a flowmeter requiring repair or
calibration to Endress+Hauser.
Always enclose a duly completed «Declaration of Conformity» form with the flowmeter. You will find a master copy of this form at the back of this manual.
Replace transmitter electronics
Components in the measuring electronics defective order spare parts → 88
Endress+Hauser 85
Troubleshooting
86
Promag 50
9.5
Response of outputs to errors
!
Note!
The failsafe mode of totalizers, current, pulse and frequency outputs can be customized by means of various functions in the function matrix. You will find detailed information on these procedures in the «Description of Device Functions» manual.
You can use positive zero return to set the signals of the current, pulse and status outputs to their fallback value, for example when measuring has to be interrupted while a pipe is being cleaned. This function takes priority over all other device functions: simulations, for example, are suppressed.
Failsafe mode of outputs and totalizers
Process/system error is current Positive zero return is activated
«
Caution!
System or process errors defined as «Notice messages» have no effect whatsoever on the inputs and outputs. See
the information on → 66
Current output MINIMUM VALUE
0–20 mA 0 mA
4–20 mA 2 mA
4–20 mA HART 2 mA
4–20 mA NAMUR 3.5 mA
4–20 mA HART NAMUR 3.5 mA
4–20 mA US 3.75 mA
4–20 mA HART US 3,75 mA
0–20 mA (25 mA) 0 mA
4–20 mA (25 mA) 2 mA
4–20 mA (25 mA) HART 2 mA
Output signal corresponds to
«zero flow»
Pulse output
Frequency output
MAXIMUM VALUE
0–20 mA 22 mA
4–20 mA 22 mA
4–20 mA HART 22 mA
4–20 mA NAMUR 22.6 mA
4–20 mA HART NAMUR 22.6 mA
4–20 mA US 22.6 mA
4–20 mA HART US 22.6 mA
0–20 mA (25 mA) 25 mA
4–20 mA (25 mA) 25 mA
4–20 mA (25 mA) HART 25 mA
HOLD VALUE
Last valid value (preceding occurrence of the fault) is output.
ACTUAL VALUE
Measured value display on the basis of the current flow measurement. The fault is ignored.
MIN/MAX VALUE FALLBACK VALUE
Signal output no pulses
HOLD VALUE
Last valid value (preceding occurrence of the fault) is output.
ACTUAL VALUE
Fault is ignored, i.e. normal measured-value output on the basis of ongoing flow measurement.
FALLBACK VALUE
Signal output 0 Hz
FAILSAFE LEVEL
Output of the frequency specified in the FALÌLSAFE VALUE function.
HOLD VALUE
Measured value display on the basis of the last saved value preceding occurrence of the fault.
ACTUAL VALUE
Measured value display on the basis of the current flow measurement. The fault is ignored.
Output signal corresponds to
«zero flow»
Output signal corresponds to
«zero flow»
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Troubleshooting
Failsafe mode of outputs and totalizers
Process/system error is current
Totalizer
STOP
The totalizers are paused until the error is rectified.
ACTUAL VALUE
The fault is ignored. The totalizer continues to count in accordance with the current flow value.
HOLD VALUE
The totalizer continues to count the flow in accordance with the last valid flow value (before the error occurred).
Status output In the event of a fault or power supply failure:
Status output non-conductive
Positive zero return is activated
Totalizer stops
No effect on status output
Endress+Hauser 87
Troubleshooting Promag 50
9.6
Spare parts
Detailed troubleshooting instructions are provided in the previous sections → 81
The measuring device, moreover, provides additional support in the form of continuous selfdiagnosis and error messages.
Fault rectification can entail replacing defective components with tested spare parts. The illustration below shows the available scope of spare parts.
!
Note!
You can order spare parts directly from your Endress+Hauser service organization by
providing the serial number printed on the transmitter’s nameplate → 6
Spare parts are shipped as sets comprising the following parts:
• Spare part
• Additional parts, small items (threaded fasteners, etc.)
• Mounting instructions
• Packaging
1
2
3
4
5
A0009764
Fig. 53:
3
4
1
2
5
Spare parts for Promag 50 transmitter (field and wall-mounted housings)
Power unit board (85 to 260 V AC, 20 to 55 V AC, 16 to 62 V DC)
Amplifier board
I/O board (COM module)
HistoROM / S-DAT (sensor data memory)
Display module
88 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Troubleshooting
9.6.1
Removing and installing printed circuit boards
Field housing: removing and installing printed circuit boards → 54
#
Warning!
• Risk of electric shock!
Exposed components carry dangerous voltages. Make sure that the power supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics compartment.
• Risk of damaging electronic components (ESD protection). Static electricity can damage electronic components or impair their operability. Use a workplace with a grounded working surface purpose-built for electrostatically sensitive devices!
• If you cannot guarantee that the dielectric strength of the device is maintained in the following steps, then an appropriate inspection must be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.
• When connecting Ex-certified devices, see the notes and diagrams in the Ex-specific supplement to these Operating Instructions.
«
Caution!
Use only original Endress+Hauser parts.
1. Switch off power supply.
2. Unscrew cover of the electronics compartment from the transmitter housing.
3. Remove the local display (1) as follows:
– Press in the latches (1.1) at the side and remove the display module.
– Disconnect the ribbon cable (1.2) of the display module from the amplifier board.
4. Remove the screws and remove the cover (2) from the electronics compartment.
5. Remove the boards (4, 6): Insert a suitable tool into the hole (3) provided for the purpose and pull the board clear of its holder.
6. Remove amplifier board (5):
– Disconnect the plug of the electrode signal cable (5.1) including S-DAT (5.3) from the board.
– Loosen the plug locking of the coil current cable (5.2) and gently disconnect the plug from the board, i.e. without moving it to and fro.
– Insert a thin pin into the hole (3) provided for the purpose and pull the board clear of its holder.
7. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Endress+Hauser 89
Troubleshooting Promag 50
4
3
5
5.1
5.3
3
5.2
3
6
2
1.2
1
1.1
Fig. 54:
1
1.1
1.2
2
3
4
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
6
Field housing: removing and installing printed circuit boards
Local display
Latch
Ribbon cable (display module)
Screws of electronics compartment cover
Aperture for installing/removing boards
Power supply board
Amplifier board
Electrode signal cable (sensor)
Coil current cable (sensor)
Histo-ROM / S-DAT (sensor data memory)
I/O board
A0002657
90 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Troubleshooting
Wall-mount housing: removing and installing printed circuit boards → 55
#
Warning!
• Risk of electric shock!
Exposed components carry dangerous voltages. Make sure that the power supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics compartment.
• Risk of damaging electronic components (ESD protection). Static electricity can damage electronic components or impair their operability. Use a workplace with a grounded working surface purpose-built for electrostatically sensitive devices!
• If you cannot guarantee that the dielectric strength of the device is maintained in the following steps, then an appropriate inspection must be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.
• When connecting Ex-certified devices, see the notes and diagrams in the Ex-specific supplement to these Operating Instructions.
«
Caution!
Use only original Endress+Hauser parts.
1. Switch off power supply.
2. Remove the screws and open the hinged cover (1) of the housing. Remove screws of the electronics module (2).
3. Then push up electronics module and pull it as far as possible out of the wall-mounted housing.
4. Disconnect the following cable plugs from amplifier board (7):
– Electrode signal cable plug (7.1) including S-DAT (7.3).
– Plug of coil current cable (7.2). To do so, loosen the plug locking of the coil current cable and gently disconnect the plug from the board, i.e. without moving it to and fro.
– Ribbon cable plug (3) of the display module.
5. Remove the screws and remove the cover (4) from the electronics compartment.
6. Remove the boards (6, 7, 8): Insert a suitable tool into the hole (5) provided for the purpose and pull the board clear of its holder.
7. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Endress+Hauser 91
Troubleshooting Promag 50
1
3
5
7.1
7.3
5
7.2
6
2
7
3
5
8
Fig. 55:
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
7.1
7.2
7.3
8
Wall-mount housing: removing and installing printed circuit boards
Housing cover
Electronics module
Ribbon cable (display module)
Cover of electronics compartment (3 screws)
Aperture for installing/removing boards
Power supply board
Amplifier board
Electrode signal cable (sensor)
Coil current cable (sensor)
Histo-ROM / S-DAT (sensor data memory)
I/O board
4
A0005409
92 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Troubleshooting
9.6.2
Replacing the device fuse
#
Warning!
Risk of electric shock! Exposed components carry dangerous voltages. Make sure that the power supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics compartment.
The main fuse is on the power supply board (→ 56).
The procedure for replacing the fuse is as follows:
1. Switch off power supply.
2. Remove the power supply board: field housing → 89, wall-mount housing → 91
3. Remove cap (1) and replace the device fuse (2).
Use only fuses of the following type:
– Power supply 20 to 55 V AC / 16 to 62 V DC 2.0 A slow-blow / 250 V;
5.2 × 20 mm
– Power supply 85 to 260 V AC 0.8 A slow-blow / 250 V; 5.2 × 20 mm
– Ex-rated devices see the Ex documentation.
«
4. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Caution!
Use only original Endress+Hauser parts.
Endress+Hauser
2
1
Fig. 56:
1
2
Replacing the device fuse on the power supply board
Protective cap
Device fuse
a0001148
93
Troubleshooting Promag 50
9.6.3
Replacing the exchangeable electrode
The Promag W sensor (DN 350 to 2000 / 14 to 78″) is available with exchangeable measuring electrodes as an option. This design permits the measuring electrodes to be replaced or cleaned under process conditions.
A B
3 2
1
8
11
4
7
1
6
10
9
5
Fig. 57: Apparatus for replacing exchangeable measuring electrodes
View A = DN 1200 to 2000 (48 to 78″)
View B = DN 350 to 1050 (14 to 42″)
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
11
Allen screw
Handle
Electrode cable
Knurled nut (locknut)
Measuring electrode
Stop cock (ball valve)
Retaining cylinder
Locking pin (for handle)
Ball-valve housing
Seal (retaining cylinder)
Coil spring
a0004447
94 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Troubleshooting
Removing the electrode
1 Loosen Allen screw (1) and remove the cover.
2 Remove electrode cable (3) secured to handle
(2).
3 Loosen knurled nut (4) by hand.
This knurled nut acts as a locknut.
4 Remove electrode (5) by turning handle (2). The electrode can now be pulled out of retaining cylinder (7) as far as a defined stop.
#
Warning!
Risk of injury.
Under process conditions (pressure in the piping system) the electrode can recoil suddenly against its stop. Apply counter-pressure while releasing the electrode.
5 Close stop cock (6) after pulling out the electrode as far as it will go.
#
Warning!
Do not subsequently open the stop cock, in order to prevent fluid escaping.
6 Remove the electrode complete with retaining cylinder (7).
7 Remove handle (2) from electrode (5) by pressing out locking pin (8). Take care not to lose coil spring (11).
5 Open stop cock (6) and turn handle (2) to screw the electrode all the way into the retaining cylinder.
6 Screw knurled nut (4) onto the retaining cylinder. This firmly locates the electrode in position.
7 Use the Allen screw to secure electrode cable (3) to handle (2).
«
Caution!
Make sure that the machine screw securing the electrode cable is firmly tightened. This is essential to ensure correct electrical contact and correct measuring signals.
8 Reinstall the cover and tighten Allen screw (a).
8 Remove the old electrode and insert the new electrode.
Replacement electrodes can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser.
Installing the electrode
1 Insert new electrode (5) into retaining cylinder
(7) from below. Make sure that the seals at the tip of the electrode are clean.
2 Mount handle (2) on the electrode and insert locking pin (8) to secure it in position.
«
Caution!
Make sure that coil spring (11) is inserted. This is essential to ensure correct electrical contact and correct measuring signals.
3 Pull the electrode back until the tip of the electrode no longer protrudes from retaining cylinder (7).
4 Screw the retaining cylinder (7) onto ball-valve housing (9) and tighten it by hand.
Seal (10) on the cylinder must be correctly seated and clean.
!
Note!
Make sure that the rubber hoses on retaining cylinder (7) and stop cock (6) are of the same color (red or blue).
Endress+Hauser 95
Troubleshooting Promag 50
9.7
Return
«
Caution!
Do not return a measuring device if you are not absolutely certain that all traces of hazardous substances have been removed, e.g. substances which have penetrated crevices or diffused through plastic.
Costs incurred for waste disposal and injury (burns, etc.) due to inadequate cleaning will be charged to the owner-operator.
The following steps must be taken before returning a flow measuring device to
Endress+Hauser, e.g. for repair or calibration:
• Always enclose a duly completed «Declaration of contamination» form. Only then can
Endress+Hauser transport, examine and repair a returned device.
• Enclose special handling instructions if necessary, for example a safety data sheet as per
EC REACH Regulation No. 1907/2006.
• Remove all residues. Pay special attention to the grooves for seals and crevices which could contain residues. This is particularly important if the substance is hazardous to health, e.g. flammable, toxic, caustic, carcinogenic, etc.
!
Note!
You will find a preprinted «Declaration of contamination» form at the back of these Operating
Instructions.
9.8
Disposal
Observe the regulations applicable in your country!
9.9
Software history
Date Software version Changes to software
01.2011
Amplifier:
V 2.04.XX
11.2009
Amplifier:
V 2.03.XX
06.2009
Amplifier:
V 2.02.XX
03.2009
Amplifier:
V 2.02.XX
11.2004
Amplifier:
1.06.01
Communication module:
1.04.00
10.2003
Amplifier:
1.06.00
Communication module:
1.03.00
Introduction of new nominal diameters; calf values to 2.5
Introduction of Calf history
Introduction of Promag L
Introduction of Promag D
Introduction of new nominal diameter
Software update relevant only for production
Software expASMEon:
• Language groups
• Flow direction pulse output selectable
New functionalities:
• Second Totalizer
• Adjustable backlight (display)
• Operation hours counter
• Simulation function for pulse output
• Counter for access code
• Reset function (fault history)
• Up-/download with FieldTool
Operating
Instructions
71249447 / 15.14
71106181 / 12.09
71105332 / 11.09
71095684 / 06.09
71088677 / 03.09
50097089 / 10.03
50097089 / 10.03
96 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Troubleshooting
Date Software version Changes to software
08.2003
Communication module:
1.02.01
08.2002
03.2002
Amplifier:
1.04.00
Amplifier:
1.03.00
06.2001
Amplifier:
1.02.00
Communication module:
1.02.00
09.2000
Amplifier:
1.01.01
Communication module:
1.01.00
08.2000
Amplifier:
1.01.00
04.2000
Amplifier:
1.00.00
Communication module:
1.00.00
Software expASMEon:
• New / revised functionalities
New functionalities:
• Current span NAMUR NE 43
• Failsafe mode function
• Troubleshooting function
• System and process error messages
• Response of status output
Software expASMEon:
• New / revised functionalities
New functionalities:
• Current span NAMUR NE 43
• EPD (new mode)
• Failsafe mode function
• Acknowledge fault function
• Troubleshooting function
• System and process error messages
• Response of status output
Software expASMEon:
• Suitability for custody transfer measurement Promag 50/51
Software expASMEon:
• New functionalities:
New functionalities:
• General device functions
• «OED» software function
• «Pulse width» software function
Software expASMEon:
• Functional adaptations
Software expASMEon:
• Functional adaptations
Original software
Compatible with:
• FieldTool
• Commuwin II (version 2.05.03 and higher)
• HART Communicator DXR 275
(from OS 4.6) with Rev. 1, DD1
Operating
Instructions
50097089 / 08.03
50097089 / 08.02
none
50097089 / 06.01
none none
50097089 / 04.00
!
Note!
Uploads or downloads between the individual software versions are only possible with a special service software.
Endress+Hauser 97
Technical data
98
10 Technical data
10.1
Technical data at a glance
10.1.1 Application
→ 4
10.1.2 Function and system design
Measuring principle
Electromagnetic flow measurement on the basis of Faraday’s Law.
Measuring system
→ 6
10.1.3 Input
Measured variable
Flow velocity (proportional to induced voltage)
Measuring range
Typically v = 0.01 to 10 m/s (0.033 to 33 ft/s) with the specified accuracy
Operable flow range
Over 1000 : 1
Input signal
Status input (auxiliary input)
• Galvanically isolated
• U = 3 to 30 V DC
• Ri = 5 k
• Can be configured for: totalizer reset, positive zero return, error message reset.
10.1.4 Output
Output signal
Current output
• Galvanically isolated
• Active/passive can be selected:
– Active: 0/4 to 20 mA, R
L
< 700 (HART: R
L
– Passive: 4 to 20 mA, supply voltage V
S
250 )
18 to 30 V DC, R
• Time constant can be selected (0.01 to 100s)
• Full scale value adjustable i
150 )
• Temperature coefficient: typ. 0.005% o.f.s./°C, resolution: 0.5 μA o.f.s. = of full scale value
Promag 50
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Endress+Hauser
Technical data
Pulse/frequency output
• Galvanically isolated
• Passive: 30 V DC / 250 mA
• Open collector
• Can be configured as:
– Pulse output
Pulse value and pulse polarity can be selected, max. pulse width adjustable (0.5 to 2000 ms)
– Frequency output
Full scale frequency 2 to 1000 Hz (f max
10 s
= 1.25 Hz), on/off ratio 1:1, pulse width max.
Signal on alarm
Current output
Failsafe mode can be selected (e.g. in accordance with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43)
Pulse/frequency output
Failsafe mode can be selected
Status output
«Not conductive» in the event of fault or power supply failure
Load
See «Output signal»
Switching output
Status output
• Galvanically isolated
• Max. 30 V DC/250 mA
• Open collector
• Can be configured for: error messages, empty pipe detection (EPD), flow direction, limit values
Low flow cut off
Low flow cut off, switch-on point can be selected as required
Galvanic isolation
All circuits for inputs, outputs, and power supply are galvanically isolated from each other.
10.1.5 Power supply
Electrical connections
→ 46
Supply voltage (power supply)
• 20 to 55 V AC, 45 to 65 Hz
• 85 to 260 V AC, 45 to 65 Hz
• 16 to 62 V DC
99
Technical data
100
Promag 50
Cable entry
Power supply and signal cables (inputs/outputs):
• Cable entry M20 × 1.5 (8 to 12 mm/0.31 to 0.47 inch)
• Sensor cable entry for armored cables M20 × 1.5 (9.5 to 16 mm / 0.37 to 0.63 inch)
• Threads for cable entries ½» NPT, G ½»
Connecting cable for remote version:
• Cable entry M20 × 1.5 (8 to 12 mm/0.31 to 0.47 inch)
• Sensor cable entry for armored cables M20 × 1.5 (9.5 to 16 mm / 0.37 to 0.63 inch)
• Threads for cable entries ½» NPT, G ½»
Cable specifications
→ 51
Power consumption
Power consumption
• AC: <15 VA (incl. sensor)
• DC: <15 W (incl. sensor)
Switch-on current
• max. 3 A (<5 ms) for 24 V DC
• max. 8.5 A (<5 ms) for 260 V AC
Power supply failure
• Lasting min. 1 cycle frequency:
• EEPROM saves measuring system data
• S-DAT: exchangeable data storage chip which stores the data of the sensor (nominal diameter, serial number, calibration factor, zero point etc.)
Potential equalization
→ 55
10.1.6 Performance characteristics
Reference operating conditions
To DIN EN 29104 and VDI/VDE 2641:
• Fluid temperature: +28 °C ± 2 K
• Ambient temperature: +22 °C ± 2 K
• Warm-up period: 30 minutes
Installation:
• Inlet run >10 × DN
• Outlet run > 5 × DN
• Sensor and transmitter grounded.
• The sensor is centered in the pipe.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Endress+Hauser
Technical data
Maximum measured error
• Current output: plus typically ± 5 μA
• Pulse output: ± 0.5% o.r. ± 1 mm/s
Option: ± 0.2% o.r. ± 2 mm/s (o.r. = of reading)
Fluctuations in the supply voltage do not have any effect within the specified range.
[%]
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 1 2
0.5 %
0.2 %
Fig. 58:
0 5 10
Max. measured error in % of reading
4
15
6
20 25
8 10 [m/s] v
30 32 [ft/s]
A0005531
Repeatability
Max. ± 0.1% o.r. ± 0.5 mm/s (o.r. = of reading)
10.1.7 Installation
Installation instructions
Any orientation (vertical, horizontal), restrictions and installation instructions → 12
Inlet and outlet run
If possible, install the sensor upstream from fittings such as valves, T-pieces, elbows, etc. The following inlet and outlet runs must be observed in order to meet accuracy specifications
(→ 15, → 12):
• Inlet run: 5 × DN
• Outlet run: 2 × DN
Adapters
→ 16
Length of connecting cable
→ 19
10.1.8 Environment
Ambient temperature range
• Transmitter: –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
!
Note!
At ambient temperatures below –20 (–4 °F) the readability of the display may be impaired.
• Sensor (Flange material carbon steel): –10 to +60 °C (+14 to +140 °F)
101
Technical data Promag 50
«
Caution!
• The permitted temperature range of the measuring tube lining may not be undershot or overshot ( «Operating conditions: Process» »Medium temperature range»).
• Install the device in a shady location. Avoid direct sunlight, particularly in warm climatic regions.
• The transmitter must be mounted separate from the sensor if both the ambient and fluid temperatures are high.
Storage temperature
The storage temperature corresponds to the operating temperature range of the measuring transmitter and the appropriate measuring sensors.
«
Caution!
• The measuring device must be protected against direct sunlight during storage in order to avoid unacceptably high surface temperatures.
• A storage location must be selected where moisture does not collect in the measuring device. This will help prevent fungus and bacteria infestation which can damage the liner.
Degree of protection
• Standard: IP 67 (NEMA 4X) for transmitter and sensor
• Optional: IP 68 (NEMA 6P) for remote version of Promag E/L/P/W sensor.
Promag L only with stainless steel flanges.
Shock and vibration resistance
Acceleration up to 2 g following IEC 60068-2-6
(high-temperature version: no data available)
«
CIP cleaning
Caution!
The maximum fluid temperature permitted for the device may not be exceeded.
CIP cleaning is possible:
Promag E (100 °C / 212 °F), Promag H/P
CIP cleaning is not possible:
Promag D/L/W
«
SIP cleaning
Caution!
The maximum fluid temperature permitted for the device may not be exceeded.
SIP cleaning is possible:
Promag H
SIP cleaning is not possible:
Promag D/E/L/P/W
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
• As per IEC/EN 61326 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21
• Emission: to limit value for industry EN 55011
102 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Endress+Hauser
Technical data
10.1.9 Process
Medium temperature range
The permissible temperature depends on the lining of the measuring tube
Promag D
0 to +60 °C (+32 to +140 °F) for polyamide
Promag E
–10 to +110 °C (+14 to +230 °F) for PTFE,
Restrictions see the following diagram
TA [°F] [°C]
140
60
100
40
20
0
0
-20
-40 -40
-40 -20 0
-40 0
20 40 60 80
100
100 120 140 160
200 300
180 [°C]
TF
360 [°F]
Fig. 59: Compact and remote version Promag E (TA = ambient temperature; TF = fluid temperature)
Promag H
Sensor:
• DN 2 to 25: –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F)
• DN 40 to 100: –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F)
Seals:
• EPDM: –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F)
• Silicone: –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F)
• Viton: –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F)
• Kalrez: –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F)
Promag L
• 0 to +80 °C (+32 to +176 °F) for hard rubber (DN 350 to 1200)
• –20 to +50 °C (–4 to +122 °F) for polyurethane (DN 50 to 1200)
• –20 to +90 °C (–4 to +194 °F) for PTFE (DN 50 to 300)
Promag P
Standard
• –40 to +130 °C (–40 to +266 °F) for PTFE (DN 15 to 600 / 1/2 to 24″),
Restrictions see the following diagrams
• –20 to +130 °C (–4 to +266 °F) for PFA/HE (DN 25 to 200 / 1 to 8″),
Restrictions see the following diagrams
• –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F) for PFA (DN 25 to 200 / 1 to 8″),
Restrictions see the following diagrams
A0022937
103
Technical data
104
Promag 50
Optional
High-temperature version (HT): –20 to +180 °C (–4 to +356 °F) for PFA (DN 25 to 200 / 1 to 8″)
TA [°F] [°C]
140
60
100
40
20 n
0
PFA
0
-20 m
PTFE
-40
-40
-40 -20 0
-40 0
20 40 60 80
100
100 120 140 160
200 300
180 [°C]
TF
360 [°F]
Abb. 60: Compact version Promag P (with PFA- or PTFE-lining)
TA = ambient temperature; TF = fluid temperature; HT = high-temperature version with insulation m = light gray area
temperature range from –10 to –40 °C (–14 to –40 °F) is valid for stainless steel version only n = diagonal hatched area max. 130°C / 266 °F
foam lining (HE) and degree of protection IP 68 = fluid temperature
HT
A0002660
TA [°F] [°C]
140
60
100
40
20 n
0
PFA
0
-20 m
PTFE
-40
-40
-40 -20 0
-40 0
20 40 60 80
100
100 120 140 160
200 300
180 [°C]
TF
360 [°F]
Abb. 61: Remote version Promag P (with PFA- or PTFE-lining)
TA = ambient temperature; TF = fluid temperature; HT = high-temperature version with insulation m = light gray area
temperature range from –10 to –40 °C (–14 to –40 °F) is valid for stainless steel version only n = diagonal hatched area max. 130°C / 266 °F
foam lining (HE) and degree of protection IP68 = fluid temperature
Promag W
• 0 to +80 °C (+32 to +176 °F) for hard rubber (DN 50 to 2000)
• –20 to +50 °C (–4 to +122 °F) for polyurethane (DN 25 to 1200)
HT a0002671
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Endress+Hauser
Technical data
Conductivity
!
The minimum conductivity is 5 μS/cm ( 20 μS/cm for demineralized water)
Note!
Note that in the case of the remote version, the requisite minimum conductivity is also
influenced by the length of the connecting cable → 19
Medium pressure range (nominal pressure)
Promag D
• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
– PN 16
• ASME B 16.5
– Class 150
• JIS B2220
– 10K
Promag E
• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
– PN 10 (DN 200 to 600 / 8 to 24″)
– PN 16 (DN 65 to 600 / 3 to 24″)
– PN 40 (DN 15 to 150 / ½ to 2″)
• ASME B 16.5
– Class 150 (½ to 24″)
• JIS B2220
– 10K (DN 50 to 300 / 2 to 12″)
– 20K (DN 15 to 40 / ½ to 1½»)
Promag H
The permissible nominal pressure depends on the process connection and the seal:
• 40 bar flange, weld nipple (with O-ring seal)
• 16 bar all other process connections
Promag L
• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
– PN 6 (DN 350 to 1200 / 14 to 48″)
– PN 10 (DN 50 to 1200 / 2 to 48″)
– PN 16 (DN 50 to 150 / 2 to 6″)
• EN 1092-1, lap joint flange, stampel plate
– PN 10 (DN 50 to 300 / 2 to 12″)
• ASME B 16.5
– Class 150 (2 to 24″)
• AWWA
– Class D (28 to 48″)
• AS2129
– Table E (DN 350 to 1200
/ 14 to 48″)
• AS4087
– PN 16 (DN 350 to 1200
/ 14 to 48″)
Promag P
• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
– PN 10 (DN 200 to 600 / 8 to 24″)
– PN 16 (DN 65 to 600 / 3 to 24″)
– PN 25 (DN 200 to 600 / 8 to 24″)
– PN 40 (DN 25 to 150 / 1 to 6″)
105
Technical data
106
Promag 50
• ASME B 16.5
– Class 150 (1 to 24″)
– Class 300 (1 to 6″)
• JIS B2220
– 10K (DN 50 to 300 / 2 to 12″)
– 20K (DN 25 to 300 / 1 to 12″)
• AS 2129
– Table E (DN 25 / 1″), 50 / 2″)
• AS 4087
– PN 16 (DN 50 / 2″)
Promag W
• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
– PN 6 (DN 350 to 2000 / 14 to 84″)
– PN 10 (DN 200 to 2000 / 8 to 84″)
– PN 16 (DN 65 to 2000 / 3 to 84″)
– PN 25 (DN 200 to 1000 / 8 to 40″)
– PN 40 (DN 25 to 150 / 1 to 6″)
• ASME B 16.5
– Class 150 (1 to 24″)
– Class 300 (1 to 6″)
• AWWA
– Class D (28 to 78″)
• JIS B2220
– 10K (DN 50 to 300 / 2 to 12″)
– 20K (DN 25 to 300 / 1 to 12″)
• AS 2129
– Table E (DN 80 / 3″, 100 / 4″, 150 to 1200 / 6 to 48″)
• AS 4087
– PN 16 (DN 80 / 3″, 100 / 4″, 150 to 1200 / 6 to 48″)
Pressure tightness
Promag D
Measuring tube: 0 mbar abs (0 psi abs) with a fluid temperature of 60 °C (140 °F)
Promag E (Measuring tube lining: PTFE)
Nominal diameter Resistance of measuring tube lining to partial vacuum
Limit values for abs. pressure [mbar] ([psi]) at various fluid temperatures
25 °C
77 °F
80 °C
176 °F
100 °C
212 °F
110 °C
230 °F
[mm]
15
25
32
[inch]
½»
1″
–
[mbar]
0
0
0
[psi]
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
[mbar]
0
0
0
[psi]
0
0
0
[mbar]
100
100
100
[psi]
1.45
1.45
1.45
40
50
65
80
1 ½»
2″
–
3″
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
*
*
*
0
*
*
*
0
0
40
40
0
0
0.58
0.58
100
100
130
130
1.45
1.45
1.89
1.89
100
125
150
200
250
6″
8″
4″
–
10″
0
135
135
200
330
0
1.96
1.96
2.90
4.79
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
135
240
240
290
400
1.96
3.48
3.48
4.21
5.80
170
385
385
410
530
2.47
5.58
5.58
5.95
7.69
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Technical data
Nominal diameter Resistance of measuring tube lining to partial vacuum
Limit values for abs. pressure [mbar] ([psi]) at various fluid temperatures
25 °C
77 °F
80 °C
176 °F
100 °C
212 °F
110 °C
230 °F
[mm]
300
350
[inch]
12″
14″
400
450
500
600
16″
18″
20″
24″
* No value can be quoted.
[mbar]
400
470
540
[psi]
5.80
6.82
7.83
*
*
*
*
[mbar]
500
600
[psi]
7.25
8.70
* * 670 9.72
Partial vacuum is impermissible!
[mbar]
630
730
800
[psi]
9.14
10.59
11.60
Promag H (Measuring tube lining: PFA)
Nominal diameter
[mm]
2 to 100
[inch]
1/12 to 4″
Resistance of measuring tube lining to partial vacuum
Limit values for abs. pressure [mbar] ([psi]) at various fluid temperatures
25 °C
77 °F
0
80 °C
176 °F
0
100 °C
212 °F
0
130 °C
266 °F
0
150 °C
302 °F
0
180 °C
356 °F
0
Promag L (Measuring tube lining: Polyurethane, Hard rubber)
Nominal diameter Measuring tube lining
[mm]
50 to 1200
[inch]
2 to 48″ Polyurethane
350 to 1200 14 to 48″ Hard rubber
Resistance of measuring tube lining to partial vacuum
Limit values for abs. pressure [mbar] ([psi]) at various fluid temperatures
25 °C
77 °F
50 °C
122 °F
80 °C
176 °F
0
0
0
0
–
0
Promag L (Measuring tube lining: PTFE)
[mm]
50
65
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
Nominal diameter
6″
8″
4″
–
[inch]
2″
–
3″
10″
12″
Resistance of measuring tube lining to partial vacuum
Limit values for abs. pressure [mbar] ([psi]) at various fluid temperatures
25 °C
77 °F
90 °C
194 °F
[mbar]
0
0
0
[psi]
0
0
0
[mbar]
0
40
40
[psi]
0
0.58
0.58
0
135
135
200
330
400
0
1.96
1.96
2.90
4.79
5.80
135
240
240
290
400
500
1.96
3.48
3.48
4.21
5.80
7.25
Endress+Hauser 107
Technical data
108
Promag 50
Promag P (Measuring tube lining: PFA)
Promag P
Nominal diameter
[mm]
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
—
6″
200 8″
* No value can be quoted.
3″
4″
2″
—
[inch]
1″
—
1 ½»
0
0
0
0
0
0
Resistance of measuring tube lining to partial vacuum
Limit values for abs. pressure [mbar] ([psi]) at various fluid temperatures
25 °C
77 °F
80° C
176° F
100 °C
212 °F
130 °C
266 °F
150 °C
302 °F
180 °C
356 °F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Promag P (Measuring tube lining: PTFE)
125
150
200
250
50
65
80
100
Nominal diameter Resistance of measuring tube lining to partial vacuum
Limit values for abs. pressure [mbar] ([psi]) at various fluid temperatures
25 °C
77 °F
80 °C
176 °F
100 °C
212 °F
130 °C
266 °F
150 °C 180 °C
302 °F 356 °F
[mm]
25
32
40
[inch]
1″
–
1 ½»
[mbar] [psi]
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
[mbar] [psi] [mbar] [psi]
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
100
100
1.45
1.45
1.45
–
–
–
–
–
–
2″
–
3″
4″
–
6″
8″
10″
0
0
0
0
135
135
200
330
0
0
0
0
1.96
1.96
2.90
4.79
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
40
40
135
240
240
290
400
0
0.58
0.58
1.96
3.48
3.48
4.21
5.80
100
130
130
170
385
385
410
530
1.45
1.89
1.89
2.47
5.58
5.58
5.95
7.69
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
300
350
400
450
12″
14″
16″
18″
500
600
20″
24″
* No value can be quoted.
400
470
540
5.80
6.82
7.83
*
*
*
*
*
500
600
7.25
8.70
630
730
* 670 9.72
800
Partial vacuum is impermissible!
9.14
10.59
11.60
–
–
–
–
–
–
Promag W
Nominal diameter
[mm]
25 to 1200
50 to 2000
[inch]
1 to 40″
2 to 78″
Measuring tube lining
Polyurethane
Hard rubber
Resistance of measuring tube lining to partial vacuum
Limit values for abs. pressure [mbar] ([psi]) at various fluid temperatures
25 °C 50 °C 80 °C 100 °C 130 °C 150 °C 180 °C
77 °F 122 °F 176 °F 212 °F 266 °F 302 °F 356 °F
0
0
0
0
–
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Technical data
Limiting flow
→ 17
Pressure loss
• No pressure loss if the sensor is installed in a pipe of the same nominal diameter
(Promag H: only DN 8 and larger).
• Pressure losses for configurations incorporating adapters according to DIN EN 545
(see «Adapters» → 16)
10.1.10 Mechanical construction
Design, dimensions
The dimensions and installation lengths of the sensor and transmitter can be found in the
«Technical Information» for the device in question. This document can be downloaded as a
PDF file from www.endress.com. A list of the «Technical Information» documents available is
provided in the «Documentation» section on → 124.
Weight (SI units)
Promag D
Weight data in kg
Nominal diameter Compact version Remote version (without cable)
[mm]
25
40
50
65
80
100
[inch]
1″
1 ½»
2″
2 ½»
3″
4″
4.5
5.1
5.9
6.7
7.7
10.4
Sensor
2.5
3.1
3.9
4.7
5.7
8.4
Transmitter
Transmitter Promag (compact version): 3.4 kg (Weight data valid without packaging material)
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
Endress+Hauser 109
Technical data
110
Promag 50
Promag E
Weight data in kg
Nominal diameter
[mm] [inch]
15
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
½»
1″
–
1½»
2″
–
3″
4″
–
6″
8″
10″
12″
14″
16″
18″
20″
24″
PN 6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
77.4
89.4
99.4
114.4
155.4
PN 10
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
45.0
65.0
70.0
88.4
104.4
112.4
132.4
162.4
• Transmitter (compact version): 1.8 kg
• Weight data without packaging material
EN (DIN)
Compact version
PN 16
–
–
–
–
–
12.0
14.0
16.0
21.5
25.5
46.0
70.0
81.0
99.4
120.4
133.4
182.4
260.4
PN 40
6.5
7.3
8.0
9.4
10.6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
14.0
16.0
–
25.5
45.0
75.0
110.0
137.4
ASME
Class 150
6.5
7.3
–
9.4
10.6
–
168.4
191.4
228.4
302.4
Weight data in kg
Nominal diameter
[mm] [inch]
15
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
½»
1″
–
1½»
2″
–
–
6″
3″
4″
8″
10″
12″
14″
16″
18″
20″
24″
PN 6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
73.1
85.1
95.1
110.1
158.1
Remote version (without cable)
Sensor
EN (DIN)
PN 10 PN 16 PN 40
ASME
Class 150
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.0
63.0
68.0
84.1
100.1
108.1
128.1
158.1
• Transmitter (remote version): 3.1 kg
• Weight data without packaging material
–
–
–
–
–
10.0
12.0
14.0
19.5
23.5
44.0
68.0
79.0
95.1
116.1
129.1
178.1
256.1
4.5
5.3
6.0
7.4
8.6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
4.5
5.3
–
7.4
8.6
–
12.0
14.0
–
23.5
43.0
73.0
108.0
133.1
164.1
187.1
224.1
298.1
10.5
12.7
19.0
22.5
39.9
67.4
70.3
5.3
6.3
7.3
9.1
JIS
10K
4.5
5.3
Transmitter
Wall-mount housing
6.0
12.5
14.7
21.0
24.5
41.9
69.4
72.3
–
–
–
–
–
JIS
10K
6.5
7.3
7.3
8.3
9.3
11.1
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Endress+Hauser
Technical data
Promag H
Weight data in kg
Nominal diameter
[mm]
2
4
8
15
25
40
50
65
80
100
[inch]
1/12″
5/32″
5/16″
½»
1″
1 ½»
2″
2 ½»
3″
4″
Compact version
DIN
5.2
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
6.5
9.0
9.5
19.0
18.5
Remote version (without cable)
Sensor
2
2
2
1.9
2.8
4.5
7.0
7.5
17.0
16.5
Transmitter Promag (compact version): 3.4 kg
(Weight data valid for standard pressure ratings and without packaging material)
Transmitter
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
Promag L compact version (lap joint flanges / welded flanges DN > 350)
Weight data in kg
Nominal diameter
[mm]
50
65
80
250
300
350
375
100
125
150
200
400
450
[inch]
2″
2 ½»
3″
4″
5″
6″
8″
10″
12″
14″
15″
16″
18″
EN (DIN)
10.6
12.0
14.0
16.0
21.5
25.5
45
65
70
90
–
106
114
500
600
700
750
800
900
1000
32″
36″
40″
42″
20″
24″
28″
30″
134
157
248
–
322
402
475
–
1200 48″ 724
Transmitter Promag (compact version): 3,4 kg
(Weight data valid without packaging material)
* DN 450 AS Tab E
Compact version
(including transmitter)
EN (DIN)
–
ASME / AWWA
10.6
–
–
–
14.0
79
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
91
101
65
70
139
–
16.0
–
25.5
45
170
193
248
316
366
–
537
116
157
200
–
396
482
601
684
914
230
304
277
329
AS
–
–
–
–
–
101
107
–
–
–
–
122
135/145*
184
262
354
441
501
698
769
–
1227
111
Technical data Promag 50
Promag L remote version (lap joint flanges / welded flanges DN > 350)
Weight data in kg
Nominal diameter Remote version
500
600
700
750
800
350
375
400
450
[mm]
50
65
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
[inch]
2″
2 ½»
3″
4″
5″
6″
8″
10″
12″
14″
15″
16″
18″
20″
24″
28″
30″
32″
EN (DIN)
8.6
10.0
12.0
14.0
19.5
23.5
43
63
68
87
–
103
111
131
154
–
–
320
900
1000
36″
40″
400
473
1200
42″
48″
–
722
Transmitter Promag (remote version): 6 kg
(Weight data valid without packaging material)
*DN 450 AS Tab E
(sensor plus sensor housing without cable)
EN (DIN) ASME / AWWA
–
–
8.6
–
–
–
–
–
12.0
14.0
–
23.5
–
–
–
43
63
108
76
–
88
98
113
154
198
–
246
314
364
–
535
–
136
167
190
227
301
275
327
394
480
599
682
912
Promag L (lap joint flanges, stamped plate)
Weight data in kg
Nominal diameter
[mm]
50
[inch]
2″
65
80
100
125
150
200
2 ½»
3″
4″
5″
6″
8″
Compact version
EN (DIN)
7.2
8.0
9.0
11.5
15.0
19.0
37.5
Remote version (without cable)
Sensor EN (DIN)
5.2
6.0
7.0
9.5
13.0
17.0
35.5
250
300
10″
12″
56.0
57.0
54.0
55.0
Transmitter Promag (compact version): 3.4 kg
(Weight data valid for standard pressure ratings and without packaging material)
Transmitter
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
AS
98
104
119
132/142*
181
259
352
439
499
696
767
–
1225
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
112 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Technical data
Promag P
Weight data in kg
Nominal diameter
Compact version Remote version (without cable)
200
250
300
350
80
100
125
150
[mm] [inch] EN (DIN) /
AS*
15
25
½»
1″
6.5
7.3
32
40
50
65
1 ¼»
1 ½»
2″
2 ½»
8.0
9.4
10.6
12.0
3″
4″
5″
6″
8″
10″
12″
14″
14.0
14.4
16.0
21.5
45
65
70
115
JIS
6.5
7.3
7.3
8.3
9.3
11.1
12.5
14.7
21.0
24.5
41.9
69.4
72.3
ASME/
AWWA
6.5
7.3
–
9.4
10.6
–
14.0
16.0
–
25.5
45
75
110
175
EN (DIN) /
AS*
4.5
5.3
6.0
7.4
8.6
10.0
12.0
14.0
19.5
23.5
43
63
68
113
Sensor
JIS
400
450
500
600
16″
18″
20″
24″
135
175
175
235
205
255
285
405
133
173
173
233
Transmitter Promag (compact version): 3.4 kg
High-temperature version: + 1.5 kg
(Weight data valid for standard pressure ratings and without packaging material)
* Flanges according to AS are only available for DN 25 and 50.
7.3
9.1
10.5
12.7
4.5
5.3
5.3
6.3
19.0
22.5
39.9
67.4
70.3
43
73
108
173
12.0
14.0
–
23.5
ASME/
AWWA
4.5
5.3
–
7.4
8.6
–
203
253
283
403
Transmitter
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
Endress+Hauser 113
Technical data Promag 50
Promag W
Weight data in kg
Nominal diameter
Compact version Remote version (without cable)
250
300
350
400
100
125
150
200
[mm] [inch] EN (DIN) /
AS*
25
32
1″
1 ¼»
7.3
8.0
40
50
65
80
1 ½»
2″
2 ½»
3″
9.4
10.6
12.0
14.0
4″
5″
6″
8″
10″
12″
14″
16″
65
70
115
135
16.0
21.5
25.5
45
JIS
7.3
7.3
8.3
9.3
11.1
12.5
14.7
21.0
24.5
41.9
69.4
72.3
65
110
175
205
16.0
–
25.5
45
ASME/
AWWA
7.3
–
9.4
10.6
–
14.0
EN (DIN) /
AS*
5.3
6.0
7.4
8.6
10.0
12.0
63
68
113
133
14.0
19.5
23.5
43
Sensor
JIS
450
500
600
700
–
800
30″
32″
900 36″
1000 40″
18″
20″
24″
28″
– 42″
1200 48″
–
1400
54″
–
–
1600
60″
–
– 66″
1800 72″
175
175
235
355
–
435
575
700
–
850
–
1300
–
1700
–
2200
255
285
405
400
460
550
800
900
1100
1400
2200
–
2700
–
3700
4100
173
173
233
353
–
433
573
698
–
848
–
1298
–
1698
–
2198
–
2000
78″
–
–
2800
4600
–
–
2798
Transmitter Promag (compact version): 3.4 kg
(Weight data valid for standard pressure ratings and without packaging material)
*Flanges according to AS are only available for DN 80, 100, 150 to 400, 500 and 600
9.1
10.5
12.7
19.0
5.3
5.3
6.3
7.3
22.5
39.9
67.4
70.3
1098
1398
2198
–
2698
–
3698
4098
4598
–
458
548
798
898
253
283
403
398
73
108
173
203
14.0
–
23.5
43
ASME/
AWWA
5.3
–
7.4
8.6
–
12.0
Transmitter
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
114 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Endress+Hauser
Technical data
Weight (US units)
Promag D
Weight data in lbs
Nominal diameter
[mm]
25
40
50
80
100
[inch]
1″
1 ½»
2″
3″
4″
Compact version
10
11
13
17
23
Remote version (without cable)
Sensor
6
7
9
13
19
Transmitter
Transmitter Promag (compact version): 7.5 lbs (Weight data valid without packaging material)
13
13
13
13
13
Promag E (ASME)
Weight data in lbs
Nominal diameter
80
100
150
200
250
300
[mm] [inch]
15 ½»
25
40
50
1″
1½»
2″
3″
4″
6″
8″
10″
12″
Compact version
ASME
Class 150
14.3
16.1
20.7
23.4
30.9
35.3
56.2
99.2
165.4
242.6
Remote version (without cable)
Sensor Transmitter
ASME
Class 150 Wall-mount housing
9.92
11.7
16.3
19.0
350
400
14″
16″
303.0
371.3
293.5
361.8
450
500
600
18″
20″
24″
422.0
503.6
666.8
412.6
494.1
657.3
• Transmitter: 4.0 lbs (compact version); 6.8 lbs (remote version)
• Weight data without packaging material
26.5
30.9
51.8
94.8
161.0
238.1
13.2
Promag H
Weight data in lbs
Nominal diameter
[mm]
2
4
8
15
25
40
50
[inch]
1/12″
5/32″
5/16″
½»
1″
1 ½»
2″
Compact version
11
11
12
12
12
14
20
Remote version (without cable)
Sensor
4
Transmitter
13
4
4
4
6
10
15
65
80
2 ½»
3″
21
42
17
37
100 4″ 41 36
Transmitter Promag (compact version): 7.5 lbs
(Weight data valid for standard pressure ratings and without packaging material)
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
115
Technical data
116
Promag 50
Promag L (ASME / AWWA: lap joint flanges / welded flanges DN > 700)
Weight data in lbs
Nominal diameter
[mm] [inch]
600
700
750
800
350
400
450
500
900
1000
125
150
200
250
300
50
65
80
100
2″
2 ½»
3″
4″
5″
6″
8″
10″
12″
14″
16″
18″
20″
24″
28″
30″
32″
36″
40″
1200
42″
48″
Transmitter Promag (compact version): 7,5 lbs
Transmitter Promag (remote version): 13 lbs
(Weight data valid without packaging material)
ASME /
AWWA
Compact version
–
56
99
143
243
23
–
31
35
–
611
725
873
–
–
–
–
1063
1324
1508
2015
Remote version (without cable)
ASME /
AWWA
–
52
95
139
238
19
–
26
31
–
606
721
869
–
–
–
–
1058
1320
1504
2011
Promag P (ASME/AWWA)
Weight data in lbs
Nominal diameter
[mm]
15
25
40
50
80
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
[inch]
½»
1″
1 ½»
2″
3″
4″
6″
8″
10″
12″
14″
16″
18″
20″
24″
Compact version
14
16
21
23
31
35
56
99
165
243
386
452
562
628
893
Remote version (without cable)
Sensor
10
12
16
19
26
31
52
95
161
238
381
448
558
624
889
Transmitter Promag (compact version): 7.5 lbs
High-temperature version: 3.3 lbs
(Weight data valid for standard pressure ratings and without packaging material)
Transmitter
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50 Technical data
Promag W (ASME/AWWA)
Weight data in lbs
Nominal diameter
[mm]
25
40
50
80
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
–
800
900
1000
–
1200
–
–
–
1800
–
[inch]
1″
1 ½»
2″
3″
4″
6″
8″
10″
12″
14″
16″
18″
20″
24″
28″
30″
32″
36″
40″
42″
48″
54″
60″
66″
72″
78″
Compact version
16
21
23
31
35
56
99
143
243
386
452
562
628
893
882
1014
1213
1764
1985
2426
3087
4851
5954
8159
9041
10143
Remote version (without cable)
Sensor
12
16
19
26
31
52
95
161
238
381
448
558
624
889
878
1010
1208
1760
1980
2421
3083
4847
5949
8154
9036
10139
Transmitter Promag (compact version): 7.5 lbs
(Weight data valid for standard pressure ratings and without packaging material)
Transmitter
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
Material
Promag D
• Transmitter housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
• Sensor housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
• Measuring tube: polyamide, O-rings EPDM
(Drinking water approvals: WRAS BS 6920, ACS, NSF 61, KTW/W270)
• Electrodes: 1.4435 (316, 316L)
• Ground disks: 1.4301 (304)
Endress+Hauser 117
Technical data
118
Promag 50
Promag E
• Transmitter housing
– Compact housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
– Wall-mount housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
• Sensor housing
– DN 25 to 300 (1 to 12″): powder-coated die-cast aluminum
– DN 350 to 600 (14 to 24″): with protective lacquering
• Measuring tube
– DN 300 (12″): stainless steel 1.4301 (304) or 1.4306 (304L) (with Al/Zn protective coating)
– DN 350 (14″): stainless steel 1.4301 (304) or 1.4306 (304L) (with protective lacquering)
• Electrodes: 1.4435 (316, 316L), Alloy C22, Tantalum
• Flanges (with protective lacquering)
– EN 1092-1 (DIN2501): RSt37-2 (S235JRG2); Alloy C22; Fe 410W B
– ANSI: A105
– JIS: RSt37-2 (S235JRG2); HII
• Seals: to DIN EN 1514-1
• Ground disks: 1.4435 (316, 316L) or Alloy C22
Promag H
• Transmitter housing:
– Compact housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum or stainless steel field housing (1.4301 (316L))
– Wall-mounted housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
– Window material: glas or polycarbonate
• Sensor housing: stainless steel 1.4301 (304)
• Wall mounting kit: stainless steel 1.4301 (304)
• Measuring tube: stainless steel 1.4301 (304)
• Liner: PFA (USP class VI; FDA 21 CFR 177.1550: 3A)
• Electrodes:
– Standard: 1.4435 (316, 316L)
– Option: Alloy C22, Tantalum, Platinum
• Flange:
– All connections stainless-steel 1.4404 (316L)
– EN (DIN), ASME, JIS made of PVDF
– Adhesive fitting made of PVC
• Seals
– DN 2 to 25 (1/12 to 1″): O-ring (EPDM, Viton, Kalrez), gasket seal (EPDM*, Viton,
Silicone*)
– DN 40 to 100 (1½ to 4″): gasket seal (EPDM*, Silicone*)
* = USP class VI; FDA 21 CFR 177.2600: 3A
• Ground rings: 1.4435 (316, 316L) (optional: Tantalum, Alloy C22)
Promag L
• Transmitter housing:
– Compact housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
– Wall-mounted housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
• Sensor housing
– DN 50 to 300 (2 to 12″): powder-coated die-cast aluminum
– DN 350 to 1200 (14 to 84″): with protective lacquering
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Endress+Hauser
Technical data
• Measuring tube:
– DN 300 (12″): stainless steel 1.4301 (304) or 1.4306 (304L)
– DN 350 (14″): stainless steel 202 or 304
• Electrodes: 1.4435 (316, 316L), Alloy C22
• Flange
– EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501): DN 300: 1.4306; 1.4307; 1.4301 (304); 1.0038 (S235JRG2)
– EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501): DN 350: A105; 1.0038 (S235JRG2)
– AWWA: A181/A105; 1.0425 (316L) (P265GH); 1.0044 (S275JR)
– AS 2129: A105; 1.0345 (P235GH); 1.0425 (316L) (P265GH); 1.0038 (S235JRG2);
FE 410 WB
– AS 4087: A105; 1.0425 (316L) (P265GH); 1.0044 (S275JR)
• Seals: to DIN EN 1514-1
• Ground disks: 1.4435 (316, 316L) or Alloy C22
Promag P
• Transmitter housing:
– Compact housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
– Wall-mounted housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
• Sensor housing
– DN 15 to 300 (½ to 12″): powder-coated die-cast aluminum
– DN 350 to 2000 (14 to 84″): with protective lacquering
• Measuring tube
– DN 300 (12″): stainless steel 1.4301 (304) or 1.4306 (304L); for flanges made of carbon steel with Al/Zn protective coating
– DN 350 (14″): stainless steel 1.4301 (304) or 1.4306 (304L); for flanges made of carbon steel with Al/Zn protective coating
• Electrodes: 1.4435 (316, 316L), Platinum, Alloy C22, Tantalum, Titanium
• Flange
– EN 1092-1 (DIN2501): 1.4571 (316L); RSt37-2 (S235JRG2); Alloy C22; FE 410W B
(DN 300 (12″) with Al/Zn protective coating; DN 350 (14″) with protective lacquering)
– ASME: A105; F316L
(DN 300 (12″) with Al/Zn protective coating; DN 350 (14″) with protective lacquering)
– AWWA: 1.0425
– JIS: RSt37-2 (S235JRG2); HII; 1.0425 (316L)
(DN 300 (12″) with Al/Zn protective coating; DN 350 (14″) with protective lacquering)
– AS 2129
– DN 25 (1″): A105 or RSt37-2 (S235JRG2)
– DN 40 (1½»): A105 or St44-2 (S275JR)
– AS 4087: A105 or St44-2 (S275JR)
• Seals: to DIN EN 1514-1
• Ground disks: 1.4435 (316, 316L) or Alloy C22
Promag W
• Transmitter housing:
– Compact housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
– Wall-mounted housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
• Sensor housing
– DN 25 to 300 (1 to 12″): powder-coated die-cast aluminum
– DN 350 to 2000 (14 to 84″): with protective lacquering
119
Technical data Promag 50
• Measuring tube
– DN 300 (12″): stainless steel 1.4301 (304) or 1.4306 (304L)
(for flanges made of carbon steel with Al/Zn protective coating)
– DN 350 (14″): stainless steel 1.4301 (304) or 1.4306 (304)
(for flanges made of carbon steel with protective lacquering)
• Electrodes: 1.4435 (316, 316L) or Alloy C22, Tantalum
• Flange
– EN 1092-1 (DIN2501): 1.4571 (316L); RSt37-2 (S235JRG2); Alloy C22; FE 410 WB
(DN 300 (12″) with Al/Zn protective coating; DN 350 (14″) with protective lacquering)
– ASME: A105; F316L
(DN 300 (12″) with Al/Zn protective coating; DN 350 (14″) with protective lacquering)
– AWWA: 1.0425
– JIS: RSt37-2 (S235JRG2); HII; 1.0425 (316L)
(DN 300 (12″) with Al/Zn protective coating; DN 350 (14″) with protective lacquering)
– AS 2129
– DN 150 to 300 (6 to 12″), DN 600 (24″): A105 or RSt37-2 (S235JRG2)
– DN 80 to 100 (3 to 4″), 350 to 500 (14 to 20″): A105 or St44-2 (S275JR)
– AS 4087: A105 or St44-2 (S275JR)
• Seals: to DIN EN 1514-1
• Ground disks: 1.4435 (316, 316L), Alloy C22, Titanium, Tantalum
Pressure-temperature ratings
The material load diagrams (pressure-temperature graphs) for the process connections are to be found in the «Technical Information» documents of the device in question:
List of supplementary documentation → 124.
Fitted electrodes
Promag D
• 2 measuring electrodes for signal detection
Promag E/L/P/W
• 2 measuring electrodes for signal detection
• 1 EPD electrode for empty pipe detection
• 1 reference electrode for potential equalization
Promag H
• 2 measuring electrodes for signal detection
• 1 EPD electrode for empty pipe detection (apart from DN 2 to 15)
Process connections
Promag D
Wafer version without process connections
120 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Promag E
Flange connections:
• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
– DN 300 (12″) = form A
– DN 350 (14″) = flat face
– DN 65 PN 16 and DN 600 PN 16 only as per EN 1092-1
• ASME
• JIS
Promag H
With O-ring:
• Weld nipple DIN (EN), ISO 1127, ODT/SMS
• Flange EN (DIN), ASME, JIS
• Flange made of PVDF EN (DIN), ASME, JIS
• External thread
• Internal thread
• Hose connection
• PVC adhesive fitting
With gasket seal:
• Weld nipple DIN 11850, ODT/SMS
• Clamp ISO 2852, DIN 32676, L14 AM7
• Threaded joint DIN 11851, DIN 11864-1, ISO 2853, SMS 1145
• Flange DIN 11864-2
Promag L
Flange connections:
• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
– DN 300 = Form A
– DN 350 = Form B
• ASME
• AWWA
• AS
Promag P/W
Flange connections:
• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
– DN 300 = form A
– DN 350 = flat face
– DN 65 PN 16 and DN 600 PN 16 only as per EN 1092-1
• ASME
• AWWA (only Promag W)
• JIS
• AS
Surface roughness
All data relate to parts in contact with fluid.
• Liner PFA: 0.4 μm (15 μin)
• Electrodes: 0.3 to 0.5 μm (12 to 20 μin)
• Process connection made of stainless-steel (Promag H): 0.8 μm (31 μin)
Technical data
Endress+Hauser 121
Technical data
122
Promag 50
10.1.11 Human interface
Display elements
• Liquid crystal display: illuminated, two-line, 16 characters per line
• Custom configurations for presenting different measured-value and status variables
• 2 totalizers
!
Note!
At ambient temperatures below –20 (–4 °F) the readability of the display may be impaired.
Operating elements
• Local operation with three keys ()
• «Quick Setup» menus for straightforward commissioning
Language groups
Language groups available for operation in different countries:
• Western Europe and America (WEA):
English, German, Spanish, Italian, French, Dutch and Portuguese
• Eastern Europe/Scandinavia (EES):
English, Russian, Polish, Norwegian, Finnish, Swedish and Czech
• Southeast Asia (SEA):
English, Japanese, Indonesian
!
Note!
You can change the language group via the operating program «FieldCare».
Remote operation
Operation via HART protocol and Fieldtool
10.1.12 Certificates and approvals
CE mark
The measuring system is in conformity with the statutory requirements of the EC Directives.
Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.
C-tick mark
The measuring system meets the EMC requirements of the «Australian Communications and Media Authority (ACMA)».
Ex approval
Information about currently available Ex versions (ATEX, FM, CSA, IECEx, NEPSI etc.) can be supplied by your Endress+Hauser Sales Center on request. All explosion protection data are given in a separate documentation which is available upon request.
Sanitary compatibility
Promag D/E/L/P/W
No applicable approvals or certification
Promag H
• 3A authorization and EHEDG-tested
• Seals: in conformity with FDA (except Kalrez seals)
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Endress+Hauser
Technical data
Drinking water approval
Promag D/L/W
• WRAS BS 6920
• ACS
• NSF 61
• KTW/W270
Promag E/H/P
No drinking water approval
Pressure Equipment Directive
Promag D/L
No pressure measuring device approval
Promag E/H/P/W
The devices can be ordered with or without a PED approval. If a device with a PED approval is required, this must be explicitly stated in the order. For devices with nominal diameters less than or equal to DN 25 (1″), this is neither possible nor necessary.
• With the PED/G1/x (x = category) marking on the sensor nameplate, Endress+Hauser confirms compliance with the «Essential Safety Requirements» specified in Annex I of the
Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
• Devices bearing this marking (PED) are suitable for the following types of medium:
Media in Group 1 and 2 with a vapor pressure greater than, or smaller and equal to 0.5 bar
(7.3 psi)
• Devices not bearing this marking (PED) are designed and manufactured according to good engineering practice. They meet the requirements of Art.3 Section 3 of the Pressure
Equipment Directive 97/23/EC. The range of application is indicated in tables 6 to 9 in
Annex II of the Pressure Equipment Directive.
Other standards and guidelines
• EN 60529
Degrees of protection by housing (IP code).
• EN 61010-1
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use
• IEC/EN 61326
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC requirements)
• ASME/ISA-S82.01
Safety Standard for Electrical and Electronic Test, Measuring, Controlling and related
Equipment — General Requirements. Pollution degree 2, Installation Category II.
• CAN/CSA-C22.2 (No. 1010.1-92)
Safety requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement and Control and
Laboratory Use. Pollution degree 2, Installation Category I.
• NAMUR NE 21
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of industrial process and laboratory control equipment.
• NAMUR NE 43
Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital transmitters with analog output signal.
123
Technical data Promag 50
10.1.13 Ordering information
Detailed ordering information is available from the following sources:
• In the Product Configurator on the Endress+Hauser website: www.endress.com → Select country → Instruments → Select device → Product page function: Configure this product
• From your Endress+Hauser Sales Center: www.endress.com/worldwide
!
Note!
Product Configurator — the tool for individual product configuration
• Up-to-the-minute configuration data
• Depending on the device: Direct input of measuring point-specific information such as measuring range or operating language
• Automatic verification of exclusion criteria
• Automatic creation of the order code and its breakdown in PDF or Excel output format
• Ability to order directly in the Endress+Hauser Online Shop
10.1.14 Accessories
Various accessories, which can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser, are available for
the transmitter and the sensor → 78.
Your Endress+Hauser service organization can provide detailed information on the specific order codes on request.
10.1.15 Documentation
• Flow measuring technology (FA00005D/06)
• Technical Information Promag 50D (TI00082D/06)
• Technical Information Promag 50E (TI01161D/06)
• Technical Information Promag 50L (TI00097D/06)
• Technical Information Promag 50/53H (TI00048D/06)
• Technical Information Promag 50/53P (TI00047D/06)
• Technical Information Promag 50/53W (TI00046D/06)
• Description of Device Functions Promag 50 HART (BA00049D/06)
• Supplementary documentation on Ex-ratings: ATEX, FM, CSA, etc.
124 Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Index
A
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Applicator (selection and configuration software) . . . . 80
Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 122
C
Cable entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Cable specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Calibration factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
CE mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
CE mark (Declaration of Conformity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Centering sleeve
Promag D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 122
CIP cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Cleaning (exterior cleaning). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Code entry (function matrix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Commissioning
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Two current outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Commissioning Quick Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Commubox FXA 195 (electrical connection) . . . . . . 55, 79
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Conductivity of fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connection
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Remote version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
C-tick mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Current output
Configuration (active/passive). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
D
Declaration of Conformity (CE mark) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 102
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Device description files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Device variable via HART protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Display
Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 122
Turning the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Drinking water approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Druckgerätezulassung. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
E
Electrical connection
Commubox FXA 191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
HART handheld terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Electrical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Electrodes
EPD electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 102
Empty-pipe/full-pipe adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Endress+Hauser
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Error message types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Error messages
Process error (application error) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
System errors (device errors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Europäische Druckgeräterichtlinie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
F
Field Xpert SFX100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 80
Fieldcheck (tester and simulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Fitted electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Flow rate/limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Function matrix
Brief operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Fuse, replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
FXA193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
FXA195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
G
Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Gewicht. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Ground cable
Promag E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Promag L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Promag P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Promag W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Grounding rings
Promag H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
H
HART
Command classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Communicator DXR 375. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Device description files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Device status / Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Hazardous substances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
High-temperature version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
HOME position (operating mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
I
Incoming acceptance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Inlet/outlet run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Installation
Promag D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Promag E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Promag H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Promag L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Promag P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Promag W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Installation conditions
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
125
Promag 50
Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
EPD electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Foundations, supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Inlet/outlet run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Installation of pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Partially filled pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Installing the wall-mount housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
L
Language groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Local display
See Display
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
M
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Maximum measured error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Measuring range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Measuring system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Medium pressure range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Medium temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Mounting bolts
Promag D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Mounting the sensor
See Installing the sensor
N
Nameplate specifications
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Nominal diameter and flow rate
Promag W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
O
Operable flow range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 122
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Device description files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Operating programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Order code
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Ordering code
Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
P
Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
126
Pig (cleaning). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Post-installation
Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Potential equalization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Power supply failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Pressure Equipment Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Pressure loss
Adapters (reducers, expanders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Pressure tightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Pressure-temperature ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Process error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Process errors (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Programming mode
Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Promag D
Centering sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Mounting bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Promag D mounting kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Promag E
Ground cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Promag H
Cleaning with pigs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Grounding ring (DN 2 to 25, 1/12″ to 1″) . . . . . . . . . . 27
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Weld nipple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Promag L
Ground cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Promag P
Ground cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
High-temperature version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Promag W
Ground cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Q
Quick Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
R
Reference operating conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Endress+Hauser
Promag 50
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Remote version
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Repeatability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Replacing
Exchangeable electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Response to errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Returning devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
S
Safety icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Sanitary compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
S-DAT (HistoROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Promag D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Promag E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Promag H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Promag L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Promag P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Promag W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Serial number
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Service interface FXA 193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Shock resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
SIP cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Software
Amplifier display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Standards, guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Surface roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Switching on (measuring device). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
System error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
System errors (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
T
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Temperature
Ambient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Medium. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Tightening torques
Promag D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Promag E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Promag L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Promag P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Promag W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Transmitter
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Installing the wall-mount housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Turning the field housing (aluminum) . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Turning the field housing (stainless steel) . . . . . . . . 41
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Types of error (system and process errors) . . . . . . . . . . . 63
V
Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Vibrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
W
Wall-mount housing, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Endress+Hauser 127
www.addresses.endress.com
Operating Instructions Manual for Endress+Hauser Proline Promag 50 Kitchen Appliances, Measuring Instruments (132 pages)
Specifications:1046/1046462-proline_promag_50.pdf file (04 Jun 2023) |
Accompanying Data:
Endress+Hauser Proline Promag 50 Kitchen Appliances, Measuring Instruments PDF Operating Instructions Manual (Updated: Sunday 4th of June 2023 01:23:08 AM)
Rating: 4.2 (rated by 47 users)
Compatible devices: Prosonic S Series, Liquipoint T FTW31, Proline Prosonic Flow 91, EngyVolt RV12, Flowphant T DTT31, Endress+Hauser, Proline Promag W 400 HART, Proline t-mass B 150.
Recommended Documentation:
Text Version of Operating Instructions Manual
(Ocr-Read Summary of Contents of some pages of the Endress+Hauser Proline Promag 50 Document (Main Content), UPD: 04 June 2023)
-
41, Promag 50 Installation Endress+Hauser 41 Promag W tightening torques for AS 2129 Promag W tightening torques for AS 4087 Nominal diameter [mm] AS 2129 Pressure rating Threaded fasteners Max. tightening torque [Nm] Hard rubber 50 Table E 4 × M 16 32 80 Table E 4 × M 16 49 100 Table E 8 × M 16 38 150 Ta…
-
102, Endress+Hauser Proline Promag 50 Technical data Promag 50 102 Endress+Hauser Maximum measured error • Current output: plus typically ± 5 μA • Pulse output: ± 0.5% o.r. ± 1 mm/s Option: ± 0.2% o.r. ± 2 mm/s (o.r. = of reading) Fluctuations in the supply voltage do not have any effect within the specified range. A0005531 Fi…
-
68, Operation Promag 50 68 Endress+Hauser 11 Read unique device identification using the TAG (measuring point designation) Access type = read Bytes 0-5: TAG Device identification delivers information on the device and the manufacturer. It cannot be changed. The response consists of a 12 byte device ID if the given…
-
66, Endress+Hauser Proline Promag 50 Operation Promag 50 66 Endress+Hauser 5.4.2 Current device description files The following table illustrates the suitable device description file for the operating tool in question and then indicates where these can be obtained. HART protocol: ! Note! The «Fieldcheck» tester/simulator is used for testing f…
-
126, Technical data Promag 50 126 Endress+Hauser Drinking water approval Promag D/L/W • WRAS BS 6920 •ACS •NSF 61 • KTW/W270 Promag E/H/P No drinking water approval Pressure Equipment Directive Promag D/L No pressure measuring device approval Promag E/H/P/W The devices can be ordered with or without a PED approval.…
-
127, Promag 50 Technical data Endress+Hauser 127 10.1.13 Ordering information Detailed ordering information is available from the following sources: • In the Product Configurator on the Endress+Hauser website: www.endress.com → Select country → Instruments → Select device → Product page function: C…
-
Endress+Hauser Proline Promag 50 User Manual
-
Endress+Hauser Proline Promag 50 User Guide
-
Endress+Hauser Proline Promag 50 PDF Manual
-
Endress+Hauser Proline Promag 50 Owner’s Manuals
Recommended: NS2522, EH3612, 2006 Colorado
-
Swema SwemaMan 7
SwemaMan 7 Operating instructionsvers 1.13 MB_CW20180425SWEMA ABPepparv. 27123 56 FARSTATel: +46 8 94 00 90 Fax: +46 8 93 44 93E-mail: [email protected] Web page: www.swema.comContents:1. Introduction……………………. 12. Technical data………………….. 23. Start of instrument…………. …
SwemaMan 7 12
-
wtw Cond 3150i
ba75666edfs01 01/2007Cond 3150iOperating manualBedienungsanleitungMode d’emploiInstrucciones de operaciónConductivity Pocket MeterPage 3Leitfähigkeits-TaschenmeßgerätSeite 13Conductimètres de pochePage 21Medidor manual de la conductividadPágina 29ARS/cmTref25nLF052305°CTPO …
Cond 3150i 37
-
FLIR CM78
1.888.610.7664 [email protected] …
CM78 42
-
JEWELL DeepWater 802
USER’S MANUAL DeepWater MODEL 802 SUBMERSIBLE TILTMETER Serial No.________________ 850 Perimeter Road Manchester, NH 03103 USA Tel (603) 669-6400 Fax (603) 622-2690 e-mail: [email protected] www.jewellinstruments.com WARNING! NEVER USE AN OHMMETER TO MEASURE THE TILT SENSORS …
DeepWater 802 17
Additional Information:
Operating Impressions, Questions and Answers:
Level |
Pressure |
Flow |
Temperature |
Liquid |
Registration |
System |
Services |
Solutions |
Analysis |
Components |
Promag 50/53 P
· |
||||
· DN15…600 |
—HART |
|||
· |
PFA |
—Promag 50 PROFIBUS-PA |
||
· |
PTFE |
—Promag 53 PROFIBUS-PA/-DP |
||
PFA |
||||
+180 |
||||
· DVGW ISO |
FF |
|||
· |
· 1 |
|||
—Promag 50 ±0.5% |
ATEX FM CSA NEPSI |
|||
±0.2% |
||||
—Promag 53 ±0.2% |
||||
· IP67 |
≥5μS/cm |
|||
· IP67 |
· |
|||
·Promag 53 |
· , |
|||
· |
||||
· |
· , |
|||
— |
||||
— |
≥20μS/cm |
|||
— |
— ·
·PTFE ·PFA
TI 047D/28/zh/v2.1
Promag 50/53 P
Ue
I
V
B
I
Ue=B·L·v |
|
Q=A·v |
|
Ue= |
|
B= |
|
L= |
|
v= |
|
Q= |
|
A= |
|
I= |
|
· |
|
· |
|
·Promag 50 |
|
·Promag 53 |
|
·Promag P(DN15…600) |
Promag 50/53 P
v=0.01…10m/s
1000:1
U=3…30V DC R=5Ki Ω
Promag 53)
/ 3μA
0.005% o.r./ o.r.=4…20mA Ri≤150ΩUout=24 VDC,0/4…20mA Ri≤150ΩUmax=30 VDC
Promag 50 |
|
/ 0.01…100s) |
|
0.005% o.r. / 0.5μA |
|
· 0/4…20mA RL 700Ω(HART RL≥250Ω) |
|
· 4…20mA Vs 18…30 VDC Ri≤150Ω |
|
/ |
|
30 VDC 250mA |
|
· 2…1000Hz(fmax=1250Hz) 1:1 max.10s |
|
· (0.5…2000ms) |
|
PROFIBUS-PA |
|
·PROFIBUS-PA EN50170 2 IEC 61158-2 MBP |
|
· 11mA |
|
· 9…32V |
|
·FDE 0mA |
|
· 31.25kBit/s |
|
· Manchester |
|
· 1x 1x |
|
· |
|
· / |
|
· DIP |
Promag 50/53 P
Promag 53
/ 0.01…100s0.005% o.r./ 0.5μA
· 0/4…20mA RL 700Ω(HART RL≥250Ω) · 4…20mA Vs 18…30 VDC Ri≤150Ω
// Exi
· 24 VDC 25mA (max.250mA/20ms) RL 100Ω · 30 VDC 250mA
· 2…10000Hz(fmax=12500Hz) EEx-ia 2…5000Hz1:1 max.10s
· 0.05…2000ms
PROFIBUS-DP
·PROFIBUS-DP/-PA EN 50170 2 IEC 61158-2 MBP · 9.6 kBand…12MBaud
· · NRZ- · 2x 3x
· 1…3 · / · DIP
PROFIBUS-PA
·PROFIBUS-PA EN 50170 2 IEC 61158-2 MBP
· 11mA
· 9…32V
· 31.25kBit/s
· FDE 0mA · Manchester
· 2x 3x · 1…3 · / · DIP
FF
·FF H1 IEC 61158-2 MBP
· 12mA
· 9…32V · FDE 0mA
· 31.25kBit/s
· Manchester
· 5x 1x 1xPID · 1…3 · /
·
Promag 50/53 P
· → NAMUR NE43 · / →
· Promag 50→ · Promag 53→
“ ”
Promag 50)
max. 30 VDC/ 250mA EPD
Promag 53)
NC NO1=NO 2=NC max.30V/0.5A AC 60V/0.1A DC
EPD
Promag 50/53 P
测量单
max. 2.5 mm2
a. 85…260VAC 20…55VAC 16…62VDCNo.1 L1 AC L+ DC
No.2 N AC L- DC b. No.20-27→ 8 c. d.
e.FXA 193 Field Check ToF Tool-Field Tool/ f.
g.
Promag 50/53 P
max. 2.5 mm2
a. 85…260VAC 20…55VAC 16…62VDCNo.1 L1 AC L+ DCNo.2 N AC L- DC
b.
No.26 DP B /PA + /FF +No.27 DP A /PA — /FF — DP A =RxD/TxD-N DP B =RxD/TxD-P
c. d.
e.FXA 193 Field Check ToF Tool-Field Tool/ f.
g. PROFIBUSNo.24 +5V No.25 DGND
h.
Promag 50/53 P
Promag 50
/ |
|||||
20 + /21 — 22 + /23 — |
24 + /25 — |
26 + /27 — |
|||
50***-***********W |
— |
— |
— |
||
HART |
|||||
50***-***********A |
— |
— |
|||
HART |
|||||
50***-***********D |
|||||
HART |
|||||
50***-***********H |
— |
— |
— |
PROFIBUS-PA |
|
50***-***********S |
— |
— |
Exi |
||
Exi |
HART |
||||
50***-***********T |
— |
— |
Exi |
||
Exi |
HART |
||||
— 6
Promag 53
20 + /21 —
53***-***********A |
— |
|
53***-***********B |
||
53***-***********F |
— |
|
53***-***********G |
— |
|
53***-***********H |
— |
|
53***-***********J |
— |
|
53***-***********K |
— |
|
53***-***********S |
— |
|
53***-***********T |
— |
|
53***-***********C |
||
53***-***********D |
||
53***-***********L |
||
53***-***********M |
||
53***-***********2 |
||
53***-***********4 |
||
53***-***********5 |
||
/
22 + /23 — 24 + /25 —
— |
||
— |
— |
|
— |
— |
|
— |
— |
|
— |
||
— |
||
— |
||
— |
— |
|
Ex i |
||
— |
||
Ex i |
||
26 + /27 —
HART
HART
PROFIBUS-PA
Ex i
FF , Exi
PROFIBUS-PA
PROFIBUS-DP
FF
Exi
,HART
Exi
,HART
HART
HART
HART
HART
HART
HART
HART
Promag 50/53 P
EPD |
|||
n.c.=
/
·M20 x 1.5 8…12mm
·PG 13.5 5…15mm 1/2″NPT 1/2″
·M20 x 1.5 8…12mm
·PG 13.5 5…15mm 1/2″NPT 1/2″
·2×0.75mm 2PVC ≈Φ7mm · ≤37Ω/Km
· / ≤120pF/m
· -20…+80 · max.2.5mm 2
·3×0.38mm 2PVC ≈Φ7mm
· (EPD) 4×0.38mm2PVC ≈Φ7mm
· ≤50Ω/Km
· / ≤420pF/m · -20…+80 · max.2.5mm 2
A= b= max.2 .5mm2
1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7=
Promag 50/53 P
E+H
·IP68
EN61010 EN61326/A1 EMC NAMUR NE21
85…260 V AC 45…65Hz
20…55 V AC 45…65Hz
16…62 V DC
PROFIBUS-PA FF ,
Non-Ex 9…32V DC
Ex i 9…24V DC
Ex d 9…32V DC
AC 15VA
DC 15W
·max.13.5A( 50ms)24VDC ·max.3A( 5ms)260VAC
·EEPROM T-DAT TM Promag 53)
·S-DATTM =
求。对于分
Promag 50/53 P
法兰到连兰的接地电缆可以作为附件从E+H
·DN≤300 ·DN≥350
6mm2 Cu
Promag 50/53 P
纤维或PVC
· DN 15…300 E+H · 30
·
·
6mm2 Cu
· 6mm2
·
·
a
6mm2 Cu
a= b=
Loading…